Инструкция Система Вентиляции Dräger Babylog VN500

Instructions for Use
Infinity Acute Care System
WARNING Babylog VN500

For a full understanding of the Ventilation Unit
performance characteristics of this
medical device, the user should SW 2.n
carefully read these Instructions for
Use before use of the medical device.
Working with these Instructions for Use
The title of the main chapter in the header line The illustrations show the relationship between
helps with orientation and navigation. the text and the device. Elements mentioned in the
text are highlighted. Unnecessary details are omit-
The instructions for the user combine text and il-
ted.
lustrations, providing a comprehensive overview of
the device. The information is presented as se- Schematic renderings of screen images guide the
quential steps of action, allowing the user to learn user and allow to reconfirm actions performed. The
directly how to use the device. actual screen images differ in look or in configua-
tion.
The text provides explanations and instructs the
user step-by-step in the practical use of the prod- A Letters denote elements referred to in the text.
uct, with short, clear instructions in easy-to-follow
sequence.
Typing conventions
1 Consecutive numbers indicate steps of action,
with the numbering restarting with "1" for each Any text shown on the screen and any labeling on
new sequence of actions. the device are printed in bold and italics, for exam-
z Bullet points indicate individual actions or ple, PEEP, Air or Alarm Settings.
different options for action. The "greater than" symbol > indicates the naviga-
– Dashes indicate the listing of data, options or tion path in a dialog window, for example, System
objects. setup > Ventilation > Basic settings. In this ex-
(A) Letters in parentheses refer to elements in the ample, System setup represents the dialog win-
relevant illustration. dow title, Ventilation represents a horizontal tab
and Basic settings a vertical tab.
Trademarks
– Infinity®
– Babylog®
– QuickSet®
– ATC®
– Acute Care SystemTM
– Medical CockpitTM
are trademarks owned by Dräger.
2 Instructions for Use Infinity Acute Care System – Babylog VN500 SW 2.n
Definitions
WARNING CAUTION
A WARNING statement provides important in- A CAUTION statement provides important infor-
formation about a potentially hazardous situa- mation about a potentially hazardous situation
tion which, if not avoided, could result in which, if not avoided, may result in minor or mod-
death or serious injury. erate injury to the user or patient or in damage to
the medical device or other property.
NOTE
A NOTE provides additional information intended
to avoid inconvenience during operation.
Abbreviations and Symbols
Please refer to "Abbreviations" on page 25 and

"Symbols" on page 29 for explanations.
Instructions for Use Infinity Acute Care System – Babylog VN500 SW 2.n 3
This page intentionally left blank
Content
Content
Working with these Instructions for Use . . . . . . 2 Selecting Tube or NIV application mode . . . . 68
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Select therapy type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Start therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Abbreviations and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Displaying the status of accessories . . . . . . . . 71
For Your Safety and that of Your Patients . . 7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

General WARNINGS and CAUTIONS . . . . . . 10 Setting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Display curves and measured values . . . . . . . 85
Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Indications for use and contraindications . . . . . 16 Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver. . . . 90
Environment of use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Manual inspiration – Manual inspiration/hold . 92
Medication nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Gas supply unit GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
O2 Therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Infinity Acute Care System – Workstation
Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Neonatal Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Ending operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Babylog VN500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storing Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mains power supply / DC power supply . . . . . 105
Gas supply unit GS500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power supply unit PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Power supply unit PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Range of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Display of alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Operating Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Displaying information on alarms . . . . . . . . . . 113
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Operating concept for Infinity C500 . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting the alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Operating concept for Babylog VN500 . . . . . . 32
Setting the volume of the alarm tone . . . . . . . 116
Suppressing the alarm tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Position of the user to the alarm system . . . . . 117
Safety information on preparation . . . . . . . . . . 38 Failure of the acoustic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Preparing Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Preparing Infinity C500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Trends and Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Preparing Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Transportation of patients within the
Displaying trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
hospital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Display data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Display logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Data export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Safety information on getting started . . . . . . . . 58
Switching on Babylog VN500 and Infinity C500 58
Select patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting the breathing circuit and the
breathing gas humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Check readiness for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Content
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Information on calibrating the sensors . . . . . . . 128 Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Neonatal flow sensor calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Calibrating the O2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Calibrating the CO2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Displayed measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Deactivating or activating monitoring . . . . . . . . 137 Displayed calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Neonatal flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Possible displays for measured values . . . . . . 140 Operating data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Device ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Automatic alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Information on configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configuring the screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Description of the ventilation modes . . . . . . . . 236
Configuring ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Additional settings for ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . 249
Importing and exporting configurations . . . . . . 159 Special procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Description of the therapy types . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Exchange intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Automatic leakage compensation . . . . . . . . . 265
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Service dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Pneumatic functional description . . . . . . . . . . 268
Main menu bar structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Alarm – Cause – Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Factory-set screen views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Literature references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Cleaning, Disinfection and Sterilization . . . 193
Safety information on reprocessing . . . . . . . . . 194 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Dismantling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Reprocessing methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Reprocessing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Assembling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Before reusing on patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Maintenance intervals for Babylog VN500 . . . . 208
Safety inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Exchanging the ambient air filter . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Exchanging the diaphragm of the expiratory
valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Safety information on disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposing of packaging material . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposal of batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposal of a neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . 213
Disposal of the medical device . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
For Your Safety and that of Your Patients
Strictly follow these Instructions for Use . . . . . . 8

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Not for use in areas of explosion hazard . . . . . 8
Safe connection with other electrical
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Patient monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Functional safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
General WARNINGS and CAUTIONS . . . . . . 10

Note on EMC/ESD risk for the device
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sterile accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installing accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Keep the Instructions for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Monitoring ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Back-up ventilation with an independent
Manual ventilation device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Handling Infinity ID components. . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Strictly follow these Instructions for Use Accessories
WARNING WARNING
Any use of the medical device requires full un- Only the accessories indicated on the list of
derstanding and strict observation of all por- accessories 9039002 (1st edition or higher)
tions of these Instructions for Use. The medi- have been tested and approved to be used
cal device is only to be used for the purpose with the medical device. Accordingly it is
specified under "Intended use" on page 16 strongly recommended that only these acces-
and in conjunction with an appropriate patient sories be used in conjunction with the specific
monitoring system (see page 9). Observe all medical device. Otherwise the correct func-
WARNING and CAUTION statements through- tioning of the medical device may be compro-
out these Instructions for Use and all state- mised.
ments on medical device labels. Failure to ob-
serve these statements means that the medi-
cal device is used outside of its intended use. Not for use in areas of explosion hazard
WARNING
Maintenance
This medical device is neither approved nor
certified for use in areas where combustible or
WARNING explosive gas mixtures are likely to occur.
The medical device must be inspected and
serviced regularly by properly trained service
personnel. Safe connection with other electrical
Repair of the medical device may also only be equipment
carried out by properly trained service per-
sonnel.
Dräger recommends that a service contract be WARNING
obtained with DrägerService and that all re- Patient hazard
pairs also be carried out by them. Dräger rec- Electrical connections to equipment which is
ommends that only authentic Dräger Medical
not listed in these Instructions for Use should
repair parts be used for maintenance. Other- only be made following consultation with the
wise the correct functioning of the medical de- respective manufacturers.
vice may be compromised.
See chapter "Maintenance".
Safety inspections
The medical device must be subject to regular safe-

ty inspections. See chapter "Maintenance".
Networking This publication excludes references to various

hazards which are obvious to a medical profession-
Device combinations approved by Dräger (see In- al and operator of this medical device, to the conse-
structions for Use of the individual devices or units) quences of medical device misuse, and to poten-
meet the requirements set forth by the following tially adverse effects in patients with abnormal con-
standards: ditions. Medical device modification or misuse can
be dangerous.
– IEC 60601-1 (EN 60601-1)
Medical electrical equipment CAUTION
Part 1: General requirements for safety
Patient hazard
– IEC 60601-1-1 (EN 60601-1-1)
Individual measured values und monitoring pa-
Medical electrical equipment
rameters should not be used as the sole basis for
Part 1-1: General requirements for safety;
therapeutic decisions.
Collateral standard: Safety requirements for
medical electrical systems
– IEC 60601-1-2 (EN 60601-1-2) Patient monitoring
Medical electrical equipment
Part 1-2: General requirements for safety The operators of the medical device are responsi-
Collateral standard: Electromagnetic compati- ble for choosing appropriate safety monitoring that
bility; Requirements and tests supplies adequate information on medical device
– IEC 60601-1-4 (EN 60601-1-4) performance and patient condition.
Medical electrical equipment Patient safety may be achieved through a wide va-
Part 1-4: General requirements for safety riety of means ranging from electronic surveillance
Collateral standard: Programmable electrical of medical device performance and patient condi-
medical systems tion, to simple, direct observation of clinical signs.
If Dräger devices or units are connected with other The responsibility for the selection of the best level
Dräger devices or third-party devices and the re- of patient monitoring lies solely with the medical de-
sulting combination is not approved by Dräger, the vice operator.
operator is responsible for ensuring that the result-
ing system meets the requirements set forth by the
above standards.
Strictly follow Assembly Instructions and Instruc-
tions for Use for each networked device.
Patient safety
The design of the medical device, the accompany-

ing literature, and the labeling on the medical de-
vice take into consideration that the purchase and
use of the medical device are restricted to trained
professionals, and that certain inherent characteris-
tics of the medical device are known to the trained
operator. Instructions, WARNING and CAUTION
statements are limited, therefore, largely to the spe-
cifics of the Dräger medical device.
Functional safety
The essential performance consists in controlled

and monitored patient ventilation with user-defined
settings for the monitoring functions
– minimum breathing gas flow
– maximum airway pressure
– minimum and maximum O2 concentration in the
breathing gas
or, if a set limit is exceeded, by an appropriate
alarm. The medical device is equipped with basic
safety features to reduce the possibility of patient
injury while the cause of an alarm is remedied.
General WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
The following WARNINGS and CAUTIONS apply to WARNING

general operation of the device. WARNINGS and
Fire hazard!
CAUTIONS specific to subsystems or particular
Do not use the medical device in conjunction
features appear with those topics in later sections
with flammable gases or flammable solutions
of these Instructions for Use or in the Instructions
that can mix with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide,
for Use of any product being used with this device.
or other sources of ignition since the medical
WARNING device could ignite. Do not allow the medical
device to come into contact with sources of ig-
This medical device is only intended to be
nition.
used by trained medical personnel.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not use the medical device during magnet-
Medications and other substances based on
ic resonance (MRI, NMR, NMI)! This may im-
inflammable solvents, such as alcohol, must
pair correct functioning of the medical device
not be used in the patient system. Fire hazard!
and endanger the patient.
Adequate ventilation must be ensured if high-
ly inflammable substances are used for disin-
fection. WARNING
Do not use the medical device in hyperbaric
chambers! This may impair correct function-
ing of the medical device and endanger the pa-
tient.
WARNING CAUTION
Correct functioning of the medical device may Do not use the medical device outside of the
be impaired by operation of high-frequency specified ambient conditions. This can disrupt the
electrosurgery units, defibrillators or short- proper functioning of the medical device.
wave therapy equipment and endanger the pa-
tient. CAUTION
Keep away from sources of heat such as direct
WARNING sunlight, heat radiators or spotlights! Otherwise
Do not open the housing of the medical de- the medical device may become too hot.
vice. Danger of electrical shock.
CAUTION
WARNING Do not obstruct or close off the vents on the med-
Fire hazard! ical device. Make sure there is an adequate sup-
Do not use the medical device in oxygen- ply of air. Otherwise the medical device may be-
enriched rooms since the medical device come too hot. An alarm is triggered if the medical
could ignite. device overheats during operation.
Medical device malfunctions can increase the
O2 concentration in the ambient air. The med- CAUTION
ical device is only suitable for use in rooms
Positive-pressure ventilation can lead to negative
with adequate ventilation.
effects, such as barotrauma or strain on the circu-
latory system.
WARNING
Do not obstruct the gas inlet for the safety
valve. Otherwise, spontaneous breathing via
the emergency breathing valve is not possible
in the event of a device failure.
WARNING
With neonates, the administration of in-
creased O2 concentrations can lead to retin-
opathy of prematurity.
Use additional monitoring, e.g. external SpO2.
WARNING
During HFO, the disconnection detection and
MV monitoring are only possible to a limited
extent. For this reason, use external monitor-
ing for MV and disconnection during HFO.
CAUTION
Do not expose the medical device to strong infra-
red radiation. This can disrupt the proper function-
ing of the medical device.
Note on EMC/ESD risk for the device Sterile accessories

function
CAUTION
General information on electromagnetic compatibil- Do not use sterile-packaged accessories if the
ity EMC/ESD pursuant to international EMC stan- packaging has been opened, is damaged or there
dard IEC 60601-1-2: are other signs of non-sterility. Disposable articles
Electromedical devices are subject to special pre- may not be reprocessed and resteralized.
cautionary measures concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) and must be installed and put Reuse, reprocessing or sterilization of disposable
into operation in accordance with the EMC informa- medical products can lead to a failure of the medi-
tion provided. Observe the separate Instructions for cal devices and cause injuries to the patient.
Use "Workstation Critical Care and Workstation
Neonatal Care".
Installing accessories
Portable and mobile RF communications equip-
ment can affect medical electrical equipment.
CAUTION
WARNING Installation to the basic device must be in accor-
Connector pins with an electro- dance with the Instructions for Use for the basic
static discharge (ESD) warning device. Check that connection is secure with the
sign should not be touched and no basic device system.
connections should be made be-
tween these connectors without Strictly follow Assembly Instructions and Instruc-
implementing ESD protective measures. Such tions for Use.
precautionary procedures may include anti-
static clothing and shoes, the touch of a
ground stud before and during connecting the Keep the Instructions for Use
pins or the use of electrically isolating and an-
tistatic gloves. All staff involved in the above CAUTION
shall receive instruction in these ESD precau-
The Instructions for Use must be kept in an acces-
tionary procedures.
sible location for users.
WARNING
Do not use portable and mobile HF communi-
cations equipment, e.g., mobile phones, in the
vicinity of the medical device.
Monitoring ventilation Handling Infinity ID components
The following parameters are monitored by the Through ownership or purchase of this medical de-
built-in monitoring facilities of Babylog VN500: vice equipped with RFID technology, you have only
– Airway pressure acquired the right to use the medical device and
– Expiratory minute volume RFID technology in conjunction with products ap-
– Respiratory rate proved by Dräger and in strict compliance with
– Apnea alarm time these Instructions for Use. No intellectual property
– Inspiratory O2 concentration rights or any rights to the use of the medical device
– End-expiratory CO2 concentration or RFID technology are hereby granted, either ex-
plicitly or implicitly, which are contrary to the above-
Changes in these parameters may be caused by:
mentioned conditions.
– Acute changes in the patient's condition
– Incorrect settings and faulty handling WARNING
– Device malfunctions
Patient hazard
– Failure of power and gas supplies
Although Babylog VN500 does not exceed the
If a fault occurs in this equipment, separate mea-
valid limit values for electromagnetic fields,
suring instruments should be used.
radiation can interfere with the functioning of
During O2 therapy, the monitoring functions of the pacemakers. Wearers of pacemakers must
medical device are restricted. See chapter keep a distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)
"O2 Therapy" on page 100. from the medical device.
Back-up ventilation with an independent Emission of high-frequency energy

Manual ventilation device This medical device is equipped with an RFID
(Radio Frequency Identification) system to enable
wireless communication with Infinity ID accesso-
WARNING
ries. Any changes or modifications to the RFID sys-
If a fault is detected in the medical device, its tem may only be carried out by properly trained ser-
life-support functions may no longer be as- vice personnel. Otherwise this may compromise
sured. Ventilation of a patient using an inde- patient safety.
pendent ventilation device must be started
without delay, if necessary with PEEP and/or This medical device has been designed and manu-
an increased inspiratory O2 concentration factured to comply with emission limit values for
(e.g., with manual breathing bag MR-100). high-frequency energy. These limit values are in-
corporated in international safety standards like
IEC 60601-1-2 (EN 60601-1-2) which have been
defined by regulation authorities, such as the Fed-
eral Communications Commission (FCC Rules), In-
dustry Canada (Radio Standards Specifications)
and the European Telecommunications Standards
Institute (ETSI standards).
The RFID system of this medical device complies

with Part 15 of the FCC regulations, and its opera-
tion is subject to the following conditions:
1 This medical device does not cause any dan-
gerous interference.
2 The medical device is not liable to damage
caused by the reception of interference, includ-
ing interference causing undesired operating
conditions.
Dräger hereby declares that the ventilation unit
Babylog VN500 is in compliance with the basic re-
quirements and the other pertinent regulations of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Application
Application
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Indications for use and contraindications . . 16
Environment of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Application
Intended use
The Babylog VN500 ventilation unit of the breathing support and airway monitoring. The
Infinity Acute Care System is intended for the ven- Babylog VN500 ventilation unit is used with
tilation of neonatal and pediatric patients. Infinity C Series Dräger Medical Cockpits. The
Babylog VN500 offers mandatory ventilation Babylog VN500 ventilation unit is intended for use
modes and ventilation modes for spontaneous in different medical care areas.
Indications for use and contraindications
Indications Contraindications
The Babylog VN500 ventilation unit is used in com- There are no additional contraindications apart
bination with Infinity C Series Dräger Medical Cock- from the contraindications contained in chapter
pits. Babylog VN500 is intended to be used on pa- "For Your Safety and that of Your Patients".
tients needing respiratory support for different
It is up to the medical user to select the appropriate
medical reasons temporarily or for longer time.
respiratory mode for the underlying disease of the
patient. For all ventilator settings, the user needs to
consider the respiratory status and the general
state of health of the patient in order to optimally
adapt the ventilation settings to the patient's condi-
tion. Any changes to the patient's state need to be
monitored continuously.
Environment of use
Babylog VN500 is intended for stationary use in – In rooms without adequate ventilation
hospitals and medical rooms or for patient transpor-
tation within the hospital.
Babylog VN500 must not be used:
– In hyperbaric chambers
– For magnetic resonance imaging
(MRT, NMR, NMI)
– In conjunction with flammable gases or flamma-
ble solutions that can mix with air, oxygen or
nitrous oxide
– In areas of explosion hazard
– In areas with combustible or explosive
substances
System Overview
System Overview
Infinity Acute Care System –

Workstation Neonatal Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
How to use the Workstation Neonatal Care . . . 18
Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Gas supply unit GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power supply unit PS500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Range of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ventilation functions of Babylog VN500 . . . . . . 23
Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connections for the breathing hoses . . . . . . . . 24
Electrical power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Data transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Medication nebulizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
System Overview
Infinity Acute Care System – Workstation Neonatal Care
How to use the Workstation Neonatal

Care
A The Workstation Neonatal Care can consist of the
following units:
– Infinity C500 (Medical Cockpit)
– Babylog VN500 (ventilation unit)
– Trolley 2 - 90 cm (trolley)
– GS500 (gas supply unit)
– PS500 (power supply unit)
– Transport Supply Unit (transport supply unit)
B
Before using the Workstation Neonatal Care, care-
fully read the following Instructions for Use:
– Instructions for Use for "Workstation Critical
Care and Workstation Neonatal Care"
– Instructions for Use for "Infinity Medical Cock-
pits"
– Instructions for Use for "Babylog VN500"
– Instructions for Use for "Transport Supply Unit"
C
The Workstation Neonatal Care may include addi-
tional accessories, see separate list of accessories.
D
E
001
A Infinity C500 – control and display unit (Medical

Cockpit). Strictly follow the Instructions for Use
for "Infinity Medical Cockpits".
B Babylog VN500 – ventilation unit
C GS500 – gas supply unit
D PS500 – power supply unit
E Trolley 2 - 90 cm
System Overview
Babylog VN500
Front Front, flap folded upwards
Front, flap closed
A
B G
H
F I
C
D
J
E
071
G Silencer
070
H Gas outlet Exhaust, non-tapered connection

A Operation display of ventilation (EXHAUST – NOT FOR SPIROMETER)
During ventilation, the inspiratory and expira- I Connections for future extensions
tory phases are indicated by a bar display. The
measured values for minute volume MV and the J Nebulizer port (nebulizer gas outlet for pneu-
inspiratory O2 concentration FiO2 are also dis- matic medication nebulizer)
played.
B Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve with
expiratory port Exp. (GAS RETURN)
C Inspiratory unit (safety valve with inspiratory
port) Insp. (GAS OUTPUT)
D Gas inlet for the safety valve Emergency air
intake, non-tapered connection (EMERGENCY
AIR INTAKE), do not obstruct
E Water trap
F Flap
System Overview
Rear Left side
A
B A
C B
C
D D
E E
F F
G G
004
005
A Fuse for the internal battery
A Connection for system cable to Infinity C500 V1
B Connection for the neonatal flow sensor V5
B Connections for future extensions V2, V3
C Connections for future extensions V6, V8
C Connection for nurse call V4
D Connection for CO2 sensor V7
D Toggle switch
E Potential equalization pin
E Ambient air filter with cover
F Fuse for mains power supply F1, F2
F Strain relief for cable
G Connection for mains power supply
G Left device flap
System Overview
Right side A Connection for data cable to the gas supply unit
GS500 V9
A B Connection for gas connection to the gas

supply unit GS500
C Connection for Air compressed gas hose Air
B (FRESH GAS)
C D Connection for O2 compressed gas hose O2
(FRESH GAS)
D E Right device flap
E
014
Trolley 2 - 90 cm
A Holder for Infinity C500
A B Handle
C Trolley column
B
D Hose hooks
E Alignment aid
C
F Humidifier holder, can be swiveled
D
G Universal holder with standard rail
E
H Double castors with locking brake, set of 4
F
D
G
H
038
System Overview
Gas supply unit GS500
Front Rear
A
C B
330
333
A LED for display of mains power supply B Rating plate

C Gas connection
Power supply unit PS500
Front Rear
F E
D
A G
C
B
331
332
A Fault indicator E Cable duct

B Charge indicator F Toggle switch of the power supply unit
C Standby key G Rating plate
D LED for display of mains power supply
System Overview
Range of functions
The functions described correspond to the overall Additional information

functionality of Babylog VN500. Some functions
For a detailed description of the ventilation modes
are only optional and may not be included in the
and the additional settings see page 236. Abbrevi-
individual device configuration. Optional functions
ations see page 25.
are shown in the separate list of accessories.
Monitoring
Ventilation functions of Babylog VN500
Patient monitoring is supported by the following
Ventilation modes:
alarm limit settings:
– Pressure-controlled ventilation:
– Maximum airway pressure Paw
– PC-CMV
– Expiratory minute volume MV
– PC-AC
– Apnea alarm time Tapn
– PC-SIMV
– Respiratory rate RR
– PC-PSV
– End-expiratory CO2 concentration etCO2
– PC-APRV
– PC-HFO The inspiratory O2 concentration is monitored by
– PC-MMV automatically set limits.
– Support of spontaneous breathing:
Babylog VN500 offers the following displays:
– SPN-CPAP/PS
– Curves
– SPN-CPAP/VS
– Graphic trends
– SPN-PPS
– Numeric trends
Additional settings for ventilation: – Loops
– Apnea Ventilation – Alarm history
– Flow trigger – Logbook
– Sigh – Numeric parameters
– Volume Guarantee – Preconfigured lists for measured values and set
– ATC values
– AutoRelease – Customized lists for measured values and set
– HFO-Sigh values
– Volume Guarantee (HFO) – Smart Pulmonary View
Special procedures: During non-invasive ventilation and O2 therapy,
– Suction maneuver certain monitoring functions are switched off or can
– Manual inspiration/hold be switched off.
– Medication nebulization
Therapy types:
– Invasive ventilation (Tube)
– O2 Therapy
– Non-invasive ventilation (NIV)
System Overview
Connections for the breathing hoses Gas supply unit GS500

The Workstation Neonatal Care may also be
For connection of the breathing hoses, the stan- equipped with the external gas supply unit GS500.
dard IEC 60601-2-12 stipulates conical inspiratory GS500 supplies Babylog VN500 with compressed
ports and expiratory ports as per ISO 5356-1 with air.
a diameter of 15 mm (0.59 inches) or 22 mm
(0.87 inches). Babylog VN500 has, like
Babylog 8000, conical inspiratory ports and expira-
Data transfer
tory ports with a diameter of 11 mm (0.43 inches).
A variety of interfaces can be used for transferring
data:
Electrical power supply – USB port for data export and configuration ex-
change using a USB storage media
Babylog VN500 is designed for connection to the – USB port for installation of optional applications
hospital's mains power supply with 100 to 240 V at using an SIM card reader with SIM card
50/60 Hz. If the mains power supply fails, – RS 232 port on Infinity C500 for data transfer
Babylog VN500 switches over (without interrup- with the MEDIBUS protocol
tion) to the internal battery in order to ensure that
operation can continue for at least 30 minutes (pro-
vided that the battery is fully charged and new).
Medication nebulizer
Power supply unit PS500 For medication nebulization a pneumatic medica-

tion nebulizer can be connected.
The Workstation Neonatal Care may also be
equipped with the external power supply unit
PS500.
Connecting accessories
PS500 is designed for connection to the hospital's
mains power supply (voltage ranges, see page 51). A humidifier and other approved accessories can
If the mains power supply fails, PS500 switches be connected to the lateral rails of Babylog VN500.
over (without interruption) to the internal batteries in In so doing, it must be ensured that the maximum
order to ensure that the operation of the Worksta- weight of 4 kg (8.8 lbs) does not exceed a maxi-
tion Neonatal Care can continue for at least mum distance of 10 cm (3.9 inches).
100 minutes (provided that the batteries are new,
fully charged and ventilation is typical). Battery op- For hose holders connected to the lateral rails of
eration is possible for longer in the absence of the Babylog VN500, the maximum weight of 1 kg
gas supply unit GS500. (2.2 lbs) must not exceed a maximum distance of
100 cm (39.4 inches).
The accessories can also be connected to the hold-
Gas supply ers provided on the trolley.
Babylog VN500 features country-specific connec-

tions for the gas supply with oxygen and medical
air.
System Overview
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

% leak Leakage in percent DCO2 Dissociation coefficient for CO2
% Tplat Plateau time in % to the inspiratory with HFO
time (set value) ΔintPEEP Additional intermittent PEEP for
%MVspon Spontaneous breathing portion of sigh (set value)
minute volume in percent ΔPhf Maximum pressure difference of
Air Connection for Air compressed gas amplitude with HFO
hose (FRESH GAS) ΔPsupp Pressure support relative
ALARM Acknowledging an alarm message (above PEEP) (set value)
RESET that is no longer active ("Reset") E Elastance
Ampl hf Pressure amplitude for HFO EIP End Inspiratory Pressure,
(set value) end-inspiratory pressure
Apnea Vent. Apnea ventilation EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
APRV Airway Pressure Release Emergency Safety air inlet, inspiratory relief
Ventilation air intake valve (EMERGENCY AIR INTAKE)
ATC Automatic Tube Compensation, ESD Electrostatic Discharge
compensation of the tube ET Endotracheal tube
resistance
etCO2 End-expiratory CO2 concentration
BF Insulation class Body Floating
ETSI European Telecommunications
BTPS Body Temperature Pressure Standards Institute, European
Saturated, measured values based Telecommunications Standards
on the condition of the patient’s Institute
lungs, body temperature 37 °C
(98.6 °F), water vapor-saturated Exhaust Gas outlet (EXHAUST – NOT FOR
gas, atmospheric pressure SPIROMETER)
C Compliance Exp. Label on the device, Expiratory port

(GAS RETURN)
C20/Cdyn Index of the last 20 % of compli-
ance in relation to the dynamic total Exp. Expiration
compliance Exp. term. Termination criterion in % from the
Cdyn Dynamic compliance peak expiratory flow
cmH2O Measuring unit for pressure FCC Federal Communications

1 cmH2O = approx. 1 mbar Commission, approval authority
for communications devices in
Compens. Degree of tube compensation the U.S.
COPD Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary fhf Frequency of oscillation for HFO
Disease (set value)
Cycles sigh Number of cycles during a sigh FiO2 Inspiratory O2 concentration
phase (set value) (set value)
System Overview

Flow Flow (set value) MV Overall minute volume
Flow Assist Flow support in SPN-PPS MV high Upper alarm limit for minute volume
(set value) MV low Lower alarm limit for minute volume
Flow trigger Trigger threshold, sensitivity MVleak Leakage minute volume
(set value)
MVmand Mandatory portion of minute
Flowsigh Flow of sighs for HFO volume
FRC Functional Residual Capacity MVspon Spontaneous breathing portion of
GS500 Gas supply unit minute volume
HF High frequency Neo. Neonates patient category
HFO High Frequency Oscillation NIV Non-Invasive Ventilation
HME Heat Moisture Exchanger NMI Nuclear magnetic imaging
hPa Hectopascal, measuring unit for NMR Nuclear magnetic resonance
pressure NTPD Normal Temperature Pressure Dry,
1 hPa = 1 mbar = approx. 1 cmH2O 20 °C (68 °F), 1013 hPa, dry
I:E Ratio of inspiratory time to O2 Connection for O2 compressed gas
expiratory time hose (FRESH GAS)
I:Ehf I:E for HFO (set value) O2 suction Suction maneuver
I:Espon I:E during spontaneous breathing Palv Alveolar pressure
IEC/CEI Alarm tone as per IEC 60601-1-8 Paw Airway pressure
Insp. Label on the device, Inspiratory Paw high Upper alarm limit for airway
port (GAS OUTPUT) pressure
Insp. Inspiration PC-AC Pressure Control-Assist Control,
Insp. flow Inspiratory flow assisted-controlled, pressure-
Interval sigh Time interval between two sigh controlled ventilation with back-up
phases (set value) respiratory rate
LAN Local Area Network PC-APRV Pressure Control-Airway Pressure

Release Ventilation, spontaneous
MAPhf Mean airway pressure for HFO breathing under continuous
(set value) positive airway pressure with brief
mbar Millibar, measuring unit for pressure releases
pressure 1 mbar = approx. PC-CMV Pressure Control-Continuous
1 cmH2O Mandatory Ventilation, continuous
MEDIBUS Dräger communication protocol for pressure-controlled ventilation
medical devices PC-HFO Pressure Control-High Frequency
mmHg Measuring unit for end-expiratory Oscillation, pressure-controlled
CO2 concentration ventilation with high-frequency
oscillation
More... Show more alarms
MRI Magnetic resonance imaging
System Overview

PC-MMV Pressure Control-Mandatory Ptrach Pressure in the trachea
Minute Volume Ventilation, R Resistance (resistance)
pressure-controlled ventilation to
ensure a mandatory volume per r² Correlation coefficient for the
minute calculation method "Least Mean
Square" for R, C and Τau
PC-PSV Pressure Control-Pressure
Support Ventilation, spontaneous REF Material and revision number of the
breathing at continuous positive medical device
pressure level with pressure RFID Radio Frequency Identification
support and back-up respiratory
RR Respiratory rate (set value)
rate
RRapn Respiratory rate of apnea
PC-SIMV Pressure Control-Synchronized
ventilation (set value)
Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation,
intermittent, triggered, pressure- RRmand Mandatory portion of respiratory
controlled ventilation rate
Ped. pat. Pediatric patient category RRsigh Respiratory rate of sighs for HFO
(set value)
PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure
RRspon Spontaneous breathing portion of
Phigh Upper pressure level in APRV
respiratory rate
(set value)
RSB Rapid Shallow Breathing, quotient
Pinsp Inspiratory pressure (set value)
of spontaneous respiratory rate
PIP Peak Inspiratory Pressure and tidal volume
Plow Lower pressure level in APRV SIM Subscriber Identity Module,
(set value) participant identification
PmanInsp Pressure of the mandatory breath Slope Pressure rise time (set value)
for the manual inspiration during
Slopesigh Pressure rise time of sighs for HFO
NIV (patient category Neo.,
ventilation mode SPN-CPAP) Smart Graphic display of lung
Pulmonary characteristics
Pmax Maximum allowed airway pressure
View
(set value)
SN Device serial number
Pmax/Paw Linking the maximum airway
high autoset pressure to the alarm limit Paw SPN-CPAP Spontaneous-Continuous Positive
high Airway Pressure, spontaneous
breathing with continuous positive
Pmean Mean airway pressure
pressure level
Pmin Minimum airway pressure
SPN- Spontaneous-Continuous Positive
Pplat Airway pressure on the plateau CPAP/PS Airway Pressure/Pressure
PS Pressure Support Support, spontaneous breathing
with continuous positive pressure
PS500 Power supply unit level with or without pressure
Psigh Inspiratory pressure of sigh for support
HFO (set value)
Psupp Pressure support absolute
System Overview

SPN- Spontaneous-Continuous Positive UIP Upper Inflection Point
CPAP/VS Airway Pressure/Volume Support, UMDNS Universal Medical Device
spontaneous breathing with Nomenclature System,
continuous positive pressure level nomenclature for medical devices
with or without volume support
UN Rated voltage
SPN-PPS Spontaneous-Proportional
Pressure Support, spontaneous USB Universal Serial Bus, serial bus
breathing with flow-proportional system
and volume-proportional pressure VG Volume Guarantee
support
VG (HF) Volume Guarantee for HFO
SpO2 Partial O2 saturation
Vol. Assist Volume support in SPN-PPS
Tapn Apnea alarm time (set value) (set value)
Τau Time constant tau VS Volume Support
Tdisconnect Time for disconnection alarm VT Tidal Volume
(set value)
VTapn Tidal volume of apnea ventilation
Te Expiratory time (set value) (set value)
Thigh Time of upper pressure level in VTe Expiratory tidal volume
APRV (set value)
VTemand Expiratory tidal volume during a
Ti Inspiratory time (set value) mandatory breath
Timax Maximum inspiratory time for flow VTespon Expiratory tidal volume during a
during pressure or volume support spontaneous breath
(set value)
VThf Tidal volume for HFO (set value for
Tisigh Inspiratory time of sigh for HFO VG (HF))
(set value)
VTi Inspiratory tidal volume
Tispon Inspiratory time of sigh for
VTimand Inspiratory tidal volume during a
spontaneous breathing
mandatory breath
Tisupp Inspiratory time during pressure
VTispon Inspiratory tidal volume during a
support
spontaneous breath
Tlow Time of lower pressure level in
VTmand Tidal volume during a mandatory
APRV
breath
Tlow max Maximum expiratory time during
VTspon Tidal volume during a spontaneous
APRV (set value)
breath
TmanInsp Duration of the breath for the
WOB Work of Breathing
manual inspiration during NIV
(Neo. patient category, SPN-CPAP
ventilation mode)
Tplat Time of inspiratory plateau
Trach. Tracheostomy tube
Tube Ø Inside diameter of tube (set value)
System Overview
Symbols
Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation

Temporarily suppress acoustic alarm Charge state of internal batteries
(Babylog VN500, PS500) <20 %
Group Views, screen displays Internal batteries (Babylog VN500,
Group Trends/Data, information on the PS500) defective or no information
course of ventilation available on their charge state
Group Special procedures Lower alarm limit
Group Alarms Upper alarm limit
Group Therapy, ventilation parameter Setting or access locked

settings Expiratory valve locked
Group configuration, system settings Setting or access unlocked
and settings for sensors
Expiratory valve unlocked
Group Start/Standby
Exhaust Gas outlet (EXHAUST – NOT FOR
System on or off (at the key on SPIROMETER)
Infinity C500) Patient category pediatric patients (Ped.
Switching the power supply unit on or off pat.)
(at the key on PS500) Neonates patient category (Neo.)
Alarm limit off Display additional information or open
Configure trends Help
Hide additional information or close Help
Save screen display
Scroll in tables or lists
1 2 3 View 1
Scroll in tables or lists
1 2 3 View 2
Close dialog window
1 2 3 View 3 Active test in the device check
Medication nebulizer Spontaneous breathing activity by the
Charge state of internal batteries patient
(Babylog VN500, PS500) 90 to 100 % Suppress acoustic alarm for 2 minutes
Audio
Charge state of internal batteries paused
(Babylog VN500, PS500) 60 to <90 % Mains power supply (AC voltage)
Charge state of internal batteries PS500, GS500: Mains power supply
(Babylog VN500, PS500) 40 to <60 % (AC voltage)
Charge state of internal batteries Power supply from the internal battery of
(Babylog VN500, PS500) 20 to <40 % Babylog VN500
System Overview
Symbol Explanation
Caution: Observe important safety
information and precautions in the
Instructions for Use.
Observe the Instructions for Use
PS500: Failure, fault
Connection for equipotential bonding
Application part type BF
Nurse call
Marking point on the trolley – do not

lean, press, push or pull against the
trolley above the marking points
ESD warning symbol
ESD warning symbol
Information on disposal
Manufacturer
2009 Manufacturing date
Connection for the neonatal flow sensor

Device ready to switch on
Device switched off
Labeling for FCC approval

Labeling in accordance with Directive
93/42/EEC concerning medical products
Labeling in accordance with Directive
1999/5/EC on radio equipment and tele-
communications terminal equipment
Serial interface (on Infinity C500)
Additional symbols on Infinity C500 (Medical

Cockpit) that are not described in these Instructions
for Use are described in the Instructions for Use for
"Infinity Medical Cockpits".
Operating Concept
Operating Concept
Operating concept for Infinity C500 . . . . . . . 32
Operating concept for Babylog VN500. . . . . 32

Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Dialog windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Therapy bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Therapy controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Setting ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Direct setting of ventilation parameters
(QuickSet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Linked setting of ventilation parameters . . . . . . 35
Operating Concept
Operating concept for Infinity C500
Infinity C500 is the central operating and display

unit. The general operating concept is described in
the Instructions for Use for "Infinity Medical
Cockpits".
Operating concept for Babylog VN500
The following operating concept only contains the A Header bar with the following fields:
specific information and operating steps for – Patient category, see page 60
Babylog VN500. – System data, e.g., state of charge of the in-
This chapter describes: ternal battery, see page 106
– Main screen – Therapy status: Therapy type (ventilation or
– Main menu bar O2 Therapy), ventilation mode and addition-
– Dialog windows al settings
– Therapy bar – Alarms, messages and instructions for the
– Therapy controls user, see page 112
– Setting ventilation parameters – Alarm status
– Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation
B Monitoring area with curves, loops, trends and
parameter
measured values, see page 85. The display
– Direct setting of ventilation parameters
can be configured, see page 144.
(QuickSet)
– Linked setting of ventilation parameters C Main menu bar with buttons for opening dialog
windows and activating functions, see page 33.
D Therapy bar with the therapy controls for the
Main screen ventilation parameters of the active ventilation
mode, see page 34.
The main screen displays the most important venti-
lation information at a glance.
A
1 2 3
B
C
D
078
Operating Concept
Main menu bar F Views... for switching to other configured moni-

toring area views, see page 85.
The main menu bar contains fixed assigned and G Trends/Data... for displaying all the measured
configurable buttons. The buttons are assigned to and set values, logbook, trends and for export-
various groups. Touching a button opens the corre- ing data, see page 119.
sponding dialog window or activates the corre-
sponding function. H Special procedures... for selecting additional
functions, e.g., suction maneuver, see page 90
or medication nebulization, see page 93.
Fixed assigned buttons
Configurable buttons
F A
Additional buttons for directly accessing functions
or dialogs can be configured. These buttons are
G B spatially assigned to the corresponding group. See
"Assigning functions to additional buttons"
C on page 146.
H
E
100
A Alarms... for setting the alarm limits and dis-

playing the alarm logbook and listing all active
alarms, see page 112.
B Ventilation settings... for setting the ventilation
mode and the ventilation parameters,
see page 74.
C Sensors/ Parameters... for calibrating the sen-
sors, see page 128, and for activating or deac-
tivating monitoring, see page 137.
D System setup... for configuring the device
functions, see page 141.
E Start/ Standby... for selecting standby mode or
starting the therapy, see page 102.
Operating Concept
Dialog windows Therapy controls
Dialog windows consist of one or several pages The therapy controls (A) are used to set the venti-
which are displayed by touching the corresponding lation parameters.
horizontal or vertical tab. Dialog windows contain
Therapy controls are contained in the therapy bar of
elements for operating the device and inform the
the active ventilation mode and in the dialog win-
user of current settings. Dialog windows can be
dow for the ventilation settings.
opened by touching a button in the main menu bar.
Ventilation settings
A C
B D E
B
B A
083
171
A Dialog window title

Start-up settings
B Tab to open a page
Arrows beside the scales on the screen knobs in-
C Message field for dialog-specific information dicate the start-up values valid when
and instructions Babylog VN500 is switched on. These start-up val-
D Button for accessing additional information and ues can be adjusted specifically as required by the
the Help function (if available) hospital. See "Configuring start-up settings for the
ventilation parameters" on page 153.
E Button for closing the dialog window
Locking mechanism
Therapy bar The therapy controls in the therapy bar can be
locked against the ventilation parameters being
The therapy bar on the main screen contains the changed by accident. See "Locking of therapy con-
therapy controls for the active ventilation mode. trols in therapy bar" on page 148.
Setting ventilation parameters

A B
C
D
078
A Name of active ventilation mode

B Message field for specific messages on the ac-
tive ventilation mode
C Button for opening the dialog window for the
128
ventilation settings of the active ventilation

1 Touch the therapy control. The color turns yel-
mode
low. The unit of the parameter to be adjusted is
D Therapy controls displayed in parentheses.
2 Turn the rotary knob to set the value.
Operating Concept
3 Press the rotary knob to confirm the value. The The therapy control changes to dark green with a
color of the therapy control turns dark green. yellow edge. The direct setting function is now ac-
tive.
The following chapters of the Instructions for Use
provide a simplified explanation of these steps:
"Use the rotary knob to set and confirm the value."
Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation

parameter
087
When a set limit of a parameter has been reached, 3 Press and hold the rotary knob and turn to set
Babylog VN500 displays a message. the value.
z Press the rotary knob to exceed the set limit. The set value is immediately effective.
The set limit can be exceeded.
If the maximum set limit for a parameter has been Exceeding the set limit of a parameter with
reached, e.g., depending on other parameters, it is direct setting
not possible to exceed the set limit. When a set limit of a parameter has been reached,
z Press the rotary knob. Babylog VN500 adopts Babylog VN500 displays a message.
the maximum possible set value. 4 Release rotary knob for a short moment.
5 Press the rotary knob again and turn it.
Direct setting of ventilation parameters The set limit can be exceeded.
(QuickSet)
When a ventilation parameter is set directly, the Linked setting of ventilation parameters
changes to a setting become immediately effective
for the patient. The user can immediately see the The linked setting is possible for PEEP/Pinsp and
effect the changed setting has on the patient. The for RR/Ti.
finally chosen setting does not have to be con-
firmed again.
Linking PEEP/Pinsp
Ventilation parameters can be set directly in all ven-
tilation modes and can be carried out in the dialog Ventilation settings D
window for the ventilation settings. Direct settings
are only possible in the therapy bar when the ther-
apy controls are not locked.
O2 and Flow cannot be set directly.
C B A
085
Setting ventilation parameters directly

1 Touch the therapy control PEEP (A) or
1 Touch the corresponding therapy control.
Pinsp (B); the color turns to yellow.
2 Press and hold the rotary knob for approx.
The Link (C) button is displayed.
3 seconds.
2 Touch the Link (C) button.
Operating Concept
The therapy control of the other linked parameter to

be linked (Pinsp or PEEP) turns yellow.
3 Turn the rotary knob to set the value for PEEP
or Pinsp. The other value is also automatically
changed so that the difference in pressure re-
mains constant.
4 Press the rotary knob to confirm the value.
Both therapy controls turn dark green.
Linking RR/Ti
Setting RR and Ti is effected analogously to the
linked setting of PEEP or Pinsp. The I:E ratio re-
mains constant. If the respiratory rate is increased,
the inspiratory time is reduced. If the inspiratory
time is increased, the respiratory rate is reduced.
Additional information
If a condition is reached in which a parameter can-
not be changed anymore when setting linked pa-
rameters, Babylog VN500 displays a correspond-
ing message in the message field (D).
Preparation
Preparation
Safety information on preparation . . . . . . . . 38
Preparing Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety information on the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting the universal holder with
standard rail to the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting the humidifier holder to the
trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Securing accessories to the standard rail. . . . . 39
Securing the compressed air cylinders to
the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preparing Infinity C500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Positioning Infinity C500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Adjusting the position of Infinity C500 . . . . . . . 41
Connecting system cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using the MEDIBUS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
LAN and USB interfaces of Infinity C500 . . . . . 43
Preparing Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Preparing the Infinity ID neonatal expiratory
valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety information for the use of HMEs,
bacterial filters and breathing circuits . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing the breathing gas humidifier. . . . . . . 46
Attaching breathing hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installing a neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Replacing the neonatal flow sensor insert . . . . 49
Installing a CO2 cuvette and CO2 sensor . . . . . 49
Connecting the electrical mains power
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Power supply unit PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Failure of the electrical power supply . . . . . . . . 52
Power supply of the gas supply unit GS500. . . 52
Connecting the gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting the nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Closing the flaps at the side of the device . . . . 54

hospital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Preparation
Safety information on preparation
WARNING WARNING
Before each use, reprocess the device and all Do not place any containers with liquid on or
accessories in accordance with the Instruc- above the device! Penetrating liquid may im-
tions for Use, see "Reprocessing list" pair the correct functioning of the device or
on page 202. Note the hospital hygiene regula- damage the device and endanger the patient!
tions!
WARNING
WARNING Failure to observe the permitted maximum
The device must not be tilted more than 10°! load and weight distribution may result in the
Failure to observe this may result in the de- device toppling over. Danger of damage to de-
vice toppling over. Danger of damage to device or personal injury! Observe the permitted
vice or personal injury! maximum load and weight distribution, see
"Maximum load" on page 228.
WARNING
Securely mount Babylog VN500. Check for se- CAUTION
cure fit. Danger of damage to device or per- When parking the device, lock all the double cas-
sonal injury! tors of the trolley and check that the brakes are
working properly.
Preparing Trolley 2 - 90 cm
Safety information on the trolley CAUTION

Connect all devices securely to the trolley. Check
WARNING for secure fit. Danger of damage to device or per-
Do not use the trolley in the event of visible sonal injury!
damage, e.g., damaged double castors! Con-
tact DrägerService.
WARNING
Do not lean, press, push or pull against the
trolley above the marking points on the trolley.
The trolley could topple over.
Preparation
Connecting the universal holder with Connecting the humidifier holder to the
standard rail to the trolley trolley
Attach the universal holder with standard rail to the The humidifier holder is attached to the front of the
front of the trolley. trolley. The humidifier holder can be fastened on
the left or right-hand side of the trolley column. The
Front of the trolley attachment of the humidifier holder on the right-
hand side is shown.
A
Front of the A
trolley C
C B
B
D
049
1 Unscrew the adjusting screw (A) completely.
192
2 Attach the right-hand side of the universal hold- 1 Hold the humidifier holder at the desired height
er to the right-hand side of the rail (B). Make on the guide (A) of the trolley column.
sure that the catch of the universal holder is
2 Turn the clamping screw (B) to the left until the
completely behind the alignment aid.
base (C) fits into the guide of the trolley column.
3 Align the universal holder (C) horizontally and
3 Turn the clamping screw (B) to the right until the
press the left-hand side of the universal holder
humidifier holder is secured firmly in the guide.
onto the left-hand side of the column.
4 Move the standard rail (D) to the desired posi-
4 Tighten the adjusting screw (A). Make sure that
tion.
the catch of the universal holder is completely
behind the alignment aid.
5 Check that the universal holder is fixed Securing accessories to the standard
securely. rail
Adjusting the height of the universal holder Secure the accessories, e.g., breathing gas humid-
ifier or medication nebulizer, to the standard rail.
1 Unscrew the adjusting screw (A). Observe the maximum load! See chapter Technical
2 Adjust the height of the universal holder (C). Data, "Maximum load" on page 228.
3 Align the universal holder horizontally.

4 Retighten the adjusting screw (A).
Preparation
Securing the compressed air cylinders CAUTION

to the trolley Not every combination of compressed air cylinder
diameter and length can be secured. When used
Only available with the option cylinder holder in combination with a pressure reducer, the com-
pressed air cylinder must not come into contact
WARNING with the console of the trolley. The maximum di-
Attach the compressed air cylinders using ameter is 176 mm (6.93 inches) when the base of
both Velcro fasteners securely to the trolley. the compressed air cylinder is resting completely
Otherwise there is a risk of the trolley toppling on the base plate of the lower holder or is semi-
over. Danger of damage to device or personal spherical in shape.
injury!
1 Place the cylinders into the mountings on the
WARNING trolley.
Have the height of the upper holder adjusted 2 Secure each cylinder with 2 Velcro fasteners
to the respective compressed air cylinders by (A).
trained service personnel. The height must be
adjusted so that the top half of the com- 3 Secure the compressed gas hoses by hanging
pressed air cylinders are secured by the Vel- them over the hose hooks (B).
cro strip. Otherwise there is a risk of the trol-
ley toppling over. Danger of damage to device
or personal injury!
WARNING
The length of the Velcro fasteners must match
the diameter of the compressed air cylinders B
to ensure that the Velcro fasteners can hold
the cylinders securely. Have an appropriate A A
Velcro strip fitted by trained service personnel
if necessary. This is essential to ensure that
the compressed air cylinders are properly se-
cured. B
Compressed air cylinders with the following dimen- A A

sions can be secured:
Diameter: 80 to 176 mm (3.15 to 6.93 inches)

Length: 420 to 760 mm (16.54 to 29.92 inches)
193
CAUTION
Position the compressed air cylinders fitted with
pressure reducers in such a way to prevent the
pressure reducers from being damaged during
transport. The lower part of the trolley is designed
to protect against collisions. Take particular care
when the compressed air cylinders being used
are too large.
Preparation
Preparing Infinity C500
Positioning Infinity C500 Adjusting the position of Infinity C500
Infinity C500 is suitable for positioning on the trolley

Tilting the position of Infinity C500
or on a standard rail.
Infinity C500 can be tilted down and up.
Positioning Infinity C500 on the trolley
A
A
B
011
1 Press and hold the tilt release button (A).
010
1 Hook the Infinity C500 holder (A) into the 2 Tilt Infinity C500 to the desired working position.
mounting (B) on the trolley.
3 Release the button and make sure that it en-
2 Tighten the locking screw (C). gages securely.
3 Make sure that Infinity C500 is securely at-
tached to the trolley. Turning Infinity C500
Infinity C500 can be turned by a maximum of 180°
Positioning Infinity C500 on a standard rail to the left or 90° to the right.
When Infinity C500 is connected to the trolley: z Turn to the desired working position.
1 Unscrew the locking screw (C).
2 Lift Infinity C500 out of the mounting (B) on the Connecting system cables
trolley.
3 Hook Infinity C500 into the standard rail. The system cable is connected to Infinity C500 and
to Babylog VN500. The system cable is fixed in a
4 Tighten the locking screw. clamp.
5 Make sure that Infinity C500 is securely at-
tached to the standard rail.
Preparation
Connecting the system cable to Infinity C500 4 Insert the system cable connector (E) into the
socket until the connector audibly clicks into
place.
5 Insert the protective sleeve (C) into the protec-
tive plate (F) at the same time.
6 Turn the protective sleeve (C) by approx. 90°
A
until the protective sleeve clicks into place. The
cable is secured.
7 Close the left-hand flap.
B Disconnecting the system cable from

Babylog VN500
018
1 Unscrew the cover from the socket (A). 1 Push the locking mechanism on the connector
(E) backwards and pull out the connector.
2 Insert the system cable connector (B) into the
socket (A). Ensure that the connector is insert- 2 Turn the protective sleeve (C) by approx. 90°
ed with the correct orientation. and pull it out of the protective plate (F).
3 Screw the cover back on.

Fixing the system cable in the clamp (G)
Connecting the system cable to Babylog VN500

1 Open the flap on the left-hand side of
Babylog VN500.
2 Route the system cable between H
Babylog VN500 and the handle. G
F
188
1 Open the clamp cover (H).

2 Place the system cable into the clamp. Keep the
D E cable length short between the clamp and
C Babylog VN500.
3 Close the clamp cover (H) and engage. Ensure
003
that the cover engages securely.

3 Clip the protective sleeve (C) immediately after
the connector (E) onto the system cable (D). Removing the system cable from the clamp
Align the protective sleeve so that the slots of
the protective sleeve are facing downwards and 1 Open the clamp cover.
upwards. 2 Remove the cable from the clamp.
3 Close the clamp cover and engage.
Preparation
Using the MEDIBUS protocol Configuring the interface

A description is given in chapter "Configure inter-
NOTE faces" on page 163.
All transferred data is for information only and
should not be used as basis for diagnostic or ther-
apeutic decisions. LAN and USB interfaces of Infinity C500
MEDIBUS is a software protocol for the transfer of Use of LAN interfaces (A) of Infinity C500 is only
data between Babylog VN500 and an external permitted for service purposes.
medical or non-medical device (e.g., patient moni-
tors or computers for data management systems). The USB interfaces (B) should only be used for
connecting a USB storage media or a USB SIM
The combination of Babylog VN500, Infinity C500 card reader.
and the external device must comply with the re-
quirements of Directives IEC/EN 60601-1-1 and WARNING
IEC/EN 60601-1-2. Do not simultaneously touch the connectors
of the interfaces and the patient. Danger of
Additional information electrical shock.
"MEDIBUS for Evita Infinity V500 and

Babylog VN500" (9039527)
"Dräger RS MEDIBUS Protocol Definition"
(9028258)
Connecting an external device for using

MEDIBUS
B A B
195
A
007
z Connect an external device to the interface

COM 1, COM 2 or COM 3 (A) of
Infinity C500. Use MEDIBUS cable 8416326.
Preparation
Preparing Babylog VN500
Preparing the Infinity ID neonatal

expiratory valve
WARNING
Only use properly reprocessed expiratory
valves which have been sufficiently dried.
Otherwise the proper functioning of the de-
vice may be impaired and the patient endan-
gered.
C
The expiratory valve is mounted and then inserted
040
into the ventilation unit.
3 Fit the collection container for the water trap
Mounting the expiratory valve (C).
Open the flap

Open the flap (D) before inserting the expiratory
valve.
B
A
329
1 Fit the diaphragm (A) onto the edge of the expi-

ratory valve housing. Make sure that the dia-
phragm is fitted properly.
2 If the silencer (B) has been removed, fit the si-
lencer.
006
z Lift the flap (D) by the lower edge and pivot it up-
wards.
Preparation
Insert the expiratory valve into the ventilation Safety information for the use of HMEs,
unit bacterial filters and breathing circuits
CAUTION
Additional components in the breathing circuit
such as bacterial filters or HME increase the dead
space and result in the increase of compliance or
E resistance. The use of additional components
therefore requires particular care and monitoring!
Additional components in the breathing circuit can

increase the inspiratory and expiratory breathing
resistance and exceed standard requirements.
Examples: Inspiratory and expiratory bacterial fil-
ters, HMEs.
073
Babylog VN500 is designed to minimize the pa-

1 Turn the locking ring (E) as far as possible to the
tient's work of breathing. Operation does therefore
left.
not require inspiratory or expiratory bacterial filters.
2 Push the expiratory valve into the fitting. The use of bacterial filters or HMEs requires partic-
ular care and monitoring by the user. Especially
3 Turn the locking ring (E) as far as it will go to the
during medication nebulization and humidification,
right until it clicks audibly into place.
the resistance of the expiratory bacterial filter may
4 Check that it is properly secured by gently pull- increase gradually.
ing on the expiratory valve.
A higher breathing resistance leads to a greater
work of breathing and trigger effort. Under unfavor-
Close the flap able conditions, this can lead to an undesirable in-
trinsic PEEP, which can be recognized by the fact
When the expiratory valve and the silencer are fit-
that the expiratory flow does not return to "baseline"
ted, tilt the flap (D) downwards.
at the end of expiration. If the PEEP is unaccept-
ably high, this is indicated by an alarm. The mea-
sured PEEP is then more than 4 mbar (4 cmH2O)
above the set PEEP. If the end-expiratory flow is
D high, the alarm threshold increases to a measured
PEEP value of up to 12 mbar (12 cmH2O).
A breathing resistance in the patient connection
cannot be monitored directly by Babylog VN500.
For this reason:
z Before starting ventilation, determine in standby
mode inspiratory and expiratory breathing re-
sistance in the breathing circuit by means of the
breathing circuit check.
006
z Check the condition of the patient and the de-

Leave the flap closed during ventilation. vice's measured values for volume and resis-
tance more frequently.
Preparation
z Observe the Instructions for Use for the HMEs, Connecting the breathing gas humidifier to the
bacterial filters and breathing circuits in use. humidifier holder of the trolley
Preparing the breathing gas humidifier
z Prepare the Fisher & Paykel MR 850 breathing

gas humidifier in accordance with the corre-
sponding Instructions for Use.
CAUTION
185
Do not use an HME together with a breathing gas
humidifier! This can lead to an increased breath- z Connect the breathing gas humidifier to the hu-
ing resistance. midifier holder of the trolley.
z Tilt the breathing gas humidifier into the correct
Connecting the Fisher & Paykel MR 850 position.
breathing gas humidifier
The breathing gas humidifier can be connected in Connecting the breathing gas humidifier to the
the following ways: humidifier holder on the side rail
– on the standard rail of the universal holder
If a compressor is used on the trolley, use humidifi-
– on the humidifier holder of the trolley
er holder on the side rail. The holder can be con-
– on the humidifier holder on the side rail
nected to the left-hand or right-hand side of device.
Connecting the breathing gas humidifier on the

universal holder with standard rail
B
D C
A
194
1 Hook the holder on the lateral standard rail (B)

030
of Babylog VN500. Position the holder on the

z Clamp the breathing gas humidifier to the stan- standard rail so that the flap at the side of the
dard rail (A) under the ventilation unit and screw unit can still be opened.
firmly into place.
2 Turn the clamping screw (C) until the holder is
fixed securely on the rail.
3 Attach the breathing gas humidifier to the mount
(D).
Preparation
Additional information CAUTION

For the order numbers of the holder for the breath- Do not reverse the connections for inspiration (B)
ing gas humidifier, see the list of accessories. and expiration (C). Humidification is ineffective if
the connections are reversed.
Attaching breathing hoses 3 Turn the inspiratory port and the expiratory port
in the direction of hoses.
WARNING A water trap is required for the
Do not use antistatic or conductive breathing Fisher & Paykel MR 850 breathing gas humidifier
hoses. The use of these materials increases depending on the breathing circuit used.
the danger of electric shock to the patient and 4 If a water trap is required, install the water trap
of fire in an oxygen-enriched environment. (D) in a vertical position.
5 Connect the Y-piece (E) to the breathing hoses.
CAUTION
The sterile packaging of disposable articles 6 Insert the Y-piece or the breathing hoses in the
should only be opened immediately before use. opening of the hinged arm.
Otherwise there is a risk of infection.
Using the Infinity ID breathing circuit
1 Hang the hinged arm (A) on the lateral standard
rail of Babylog VN500 and tighten the screws. Babylog VN500 recognizes the use of an Infinity ID
Depending on the desired position of the device breathing circuit. The message Infinity ID Breath-
in relation to the bed, the hinged arm can be fit- ing Circuit detected is displayed in the header bar.
ted to either side of Babylog VN500. The following Infinity ID functions are supported:
– Detection of reversed hoses
– Detection of non-compliance with the patient
category
A
C B – Automatic configuration of breathing circuit and
humidifier
These functions are only supported in standby
mode.
z Fit the Infinity ID breathing hoses in standby
mode.
E
Setting the breathing circuit
D Babylog VN500 supports the user in selecting the
breathing circuit on the page Start/Standby > Br.
circuit/ Humidifier.
057
2 Connect breathing hoses to the inspiratory port z Set the breathing circuit according to the patient
(B) and to the expiratory port (C). category.
Preparation
Whenever the breathing hoses or the breathing Installing a neonatal flow sensor Y-piece
gas humidifier have been changed (8410185)
z Check the breathing circuit, see "Performing the
breathing circuit check" on page 66.
For the order numbers of the breathing circuits and E
the hinged arm, see the list of accessories.
D
301
Installing a neonatal flow sensor
1 Connect Y-piece with integrated neonatal flow
The following neonatal flow sensors are available: sensor (D) to the breathing hoses.
– Neonatal flow sensor ISO 15 (8411130)
2 Connect plug (E) of the flow sensor cable to the
– Neonatal flow sensor Y-piece (8410185)
flow sensor.
Installing an ISO 15 neonatal flow sensor

Further procedure for both neonatal flow
(8411130)
sensors
3 Position patient connector of the Y-piece
about 45° downwards to prevent condensation
from forming on the neonatal flow sensor.
4 Route the cables along the breathing hoses to
C the device.
B
A
300
G F
1 Insert the neonatal flow sensor (A) into the pa-
tient connector of the Y-piece (B).
2 Connect plug (C) of the flow sensor cable to the
flow sensor.
302
5 Insert the connector (F) of the flow sensor cable

into the socket (G) at the rear of
Babylog VN500.
Preparation
For the order numbers of the neonatal flow sensor,
see the list of accessories. B
Replacing the neonatal flow sensor

insert
A
If the Babylog VN500 displays the alarm message
054
Neonatal flow sensor?, the insert of the neonatal
flow sensor must be replaced. 1 Insert the cuvette (A) into the patient connector
of the Y-piece. The cuvette windows are facing
to the side.
2 Fit the CO2 sensor (B) on the cuvette. The cable
is facing towards the device.
A C
B D
C
303
D
1 Disconnect the flow sensor cable (A) from the
neonatal flow sensor.
2 Press the buttons (B) on both sides while pulling
the insert (C) out of its housing.
3 Push in new insert (C) until it engages. The two
markings (D) must line up.
4 Connect plug (A) of the flow sensor cable to the
180
5 Calibrate the neonatal flow sensor,
see page 129. 3 Insert the connector of the CO2 sensor (C) into
the socket (D) at the rear of Babylog VN500.
4 Selecting the cuvette type, see page 131.
Installing a CO2 cuvette and CO2 sensor
For small premature infants, do not carry out CO2 Additional information
measurements because the CO2 cuvette signifi- "Calibrating the CO2 sensor" on page 131.
cantly increases the dead space.
For the order numbers of the accessories for the
CO2 application, see the list of accessories.
Preparation
Connecting the electrical mains power Checking the toggle switch on Babylog VN500
supply
CAUTION
If the power supply unit PS500 is connected, see Do not press the toggle switch during ventilation.
"Power supply unit PS500" on page 51.
Prerequisite: The flap on the left-hand side of the
device is opened.
Connecting the electrical mains power supply
to Babylog VN500
The mains power must conform with the voltage
range specified on the rating plate (100 V to 240 V,
50/60 Hz). H
1 Plug the appliance socket (A) onto the appli- I
ance connector (B). O
G
182
B
z Check whether the toggle switch (G) is set to
(on).
z If the toggle switch is set to (off), set the tog-
A gle switch to (on).
WARNING
Do not simultaneously touch the connectors
of the interfaces (H) and the patient. Danger of
electrical shock.
002
2 Position the power cable (C) in the clamp (D). Electricity supply from the internal battery
Fit the clamp into the housing (E). Tighten the Babylog VN500 is provided with an internal battery
screw (F) (stress relief). to ensure that operation of the device can continue
for at least 30 minutes (provided that the battery is
fully charged and new) following failure of the
F mains power supply.
CAUTION
C The internal battery is intended exclusively for
D emergency use and not for normal operation! It is
essential to operate the device with mains power
again as soon as possible after switching over to
E operation with the internal battery.
186
z Insert the mains plug into the mains power

socket.
The LED on Infinity C500 lights up green.
Preparation
For more information on the internal battery, see
"Mains power supply / DC power supply" I
on page 105. O
If the gas supply unit GS500 is connected, see A
"Power supply of the gas supply unit GS500"
on page 52.
335
z Check whether the toggle switch (A) is set to
Connecting the electrical mains power supply (on).
to PS500
z If the toggle switch is set to (off), set the tog-
The mains power must conform with the voltage gle switch to (on).
range specified on the rating plate:
z Check the toggle switch on Babylog VN500,
– 100 to 127 V at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
see "Checking the toggle switch on
– 220 to 240 V at 50 Hz
Babylog VN500" on page 50
– 220 to 240 V at 60 Hz with additional equipoten-
tial bonding
Electrical power supply from the internal
batteries
PS500 is provided with internal batteries to ensure,
following failure of the mains power supply, that the
operation of the Workstation Neonatal Care can
continue for at least 100 minutes (provided the bat-
teries are fully charged and new and ventilation is
typical).
CAUTION
The internal batteries are intended exclusively for
emergency use and not for normal operation! It is
337
essential to operate the device with mains power

z Insert the mains plug into the mains power again as soon as possible after switching over to
socket. operation with the internal batteries.
The LED on PS500 lights up green.
For more information on the power supply unit,
see PS500
Checking the toggle switch on PS500
See "Power supply unit PS500" on page 107.
CAUTION
Do not press the toggle switch during ventilation.
Preparation
Failure of the electrical power supply Central gas supply

Prerequisite: The flap on the right-hand side of the
If the power supply fails and the internal batteries of device is opened.
Babylog VN500 and PS500 are fully discharged,
then Babylog VN500 generates a power failure
alarm. The ventilation settings and the alarm limits
remain saved even in the event of a mains power
failure.
A
Power supply of the gas supply unit
B
GS500
C
If Babylog VN500 is equipped with the power sup-
ply unit PS500, then the gas supply unit is supplied
with power using the power supply unit.
If Babylog VN500 is not equipped with the power
supply unit PS500:
z Plug the mains plug of the gas supply unit into
the mains socket.
C
The LED on GS500 lights up green.
021
Connecting the gas supply 1 Screw the compressed gas hose for air to the
connection Air (A) and the O2 compressed gas
WARNING hose to the O2 connection (B) of
Do not bring any oxygen supply components Babylog VN500.
into contact with oil and grease. Danger of ex- 2 Plug the connectors into the wall outlets for the
plosion through spontaneous ignition! central gas supply.
3 Position the compressed gas hoses over the
WARNING hose hooks (C).
Only use compressed gases approved for
medical use. The compressed gases must be The gas delivered through compressed gas hoses
free of dust and oil particles and dry. Other- is used as fresh gas (FRESH GAS).
wise the proper functioning of the device can-
not be ensured. Additional information
For the order numbers of the compressed gas hos-
es, see the list of accessories.
Gas supply from cylinders

If the central gas supply fails or is not available, the
gas can be supplied from cylinders.
Preparation
Air supply from a gas supply unit (GS500), see White (NO)
"Gas supply unit GS500" on page 99.
Brown (COM)
Connecting the nurse call
Green (NC)
The nurse call is used for transmitting high priority
029
alarm messages (warning) to a central hospital
As soon as Babylog VN500 signals an alarm, the
alarm system.
connection between the white cable and the brown
cable (NO and COM) is closed and the nurse call is
Safety information for using the nurse call activated.
CAUTION
Connecting the nurse call to the ventilation unit
A fault in any of the components in the link be-
tween the nurse call and the central hospital alarm Prerequisite: The flap on the left-hand side of the
system (e.g., in the unit's electronics for nurse device is opened.
call, in the unit's power supply or in the alarm gen-
erator of the central hospital alarm system) may
result in failure of the nurse call.
CAUTION
Connection of a nurse call does not relieve staff of B
their duty to check the monitoring on the device
screen at regular intervals. Screen displays must
A
be checked regularly.
CAUTION
All alarms of Babylog VN500 must be checked
regularly even when the nurse call is connected.
Do not use nurse call as the sole source of alarm
information! 022
1 Plug the nurse call connector (A) into the socket

Connecting the nurse call to the central alarm
(B) until it engages audibly.
z The nurse call cable must be connected to the
lead to the central alarm station in the hospital NOTE
by trained service personnel. The connector must engage audibly into the sock-
et to ensure all alarm messages are transmitted
properly.
2 Check the correct operation of connected nurse

call system.
Preparation
Information on the nurse call Closing the flaps at the side of the device
High priority alarm messages (warning) are trans-
mitted to a central alarm station in the hospital. Me- z Close the lateral flaps of the device after prepa-
dium priority (caution) and low priority (note) alarm ration.
messages are not transmitted.
The nurse call is also activated when the internal
acoustic alarm generator in the device is defective.
If, in the event of an alarm, the Audio paused
key is pressed, the acoustic alarm on the device
and the nurse call are suppressed for 2 minutes.
For the order number of the nurse call cable, see
the list of accessories.
023
CAUTION
Keep both lateral flaps on the device closed dur-
ing operation to prevent accidental actuation of
the toggle switch or connections becoming loose.
Transportation of patients within the hospital
WARNING WARNING
The device must not be tilted more than 10°! Do not move trolley faster than at a walking
Failure to observe this may result in the de- pace. There is an increased danger of the trol-
vice toppling over. Danger of damage to de- ley toppling over at thresholds, uneven sur-
vice or personal injury! faces and ramps. Reduce the speed of trans-
port further. Danger of damage to equipment!
WARNING
The device must not be placed on the bed WARNING
while transferring a patient within the hospital. Two people are always required to move the
The device could topple over or fall down. device. Otherwise there is an increased risk of
Danger of damage to device or personal inju- the device toppling over.
ry!
WARNING
WARNING Make sure to securely hold onto the handle of
Do not lean, press, push or pull against the the trolley whenever moving or positioning
trolley above the marking points on the trolley. the device. Otherwise there is an increased
The trolley could topple over. risk of the device toppling over.
Preparation
WARNING Additional information

Patient hazard due to discharged batteries. Air supply from the gas supply unit GS500, see
Only start transporting patients when the bat- "Gas supply unit GS500" on page 99.
teries are sufficiently charged.
Power supply from the power supply unit PS500,
see "Power supply unit PS500" on page 107.
When transporting patients within the hospital,
medical staff must ensure that the patient is moni- For the order number of the safety bar, see the list
tored continuously. of accessories.
Using Babylog VN500 with a safety bar
CAUTION
During the transportation of patients within the
hospital, Babylog VN500 must be used with a
safety bar (A) in order to prevent accidental dis-
connection of the breathing hoses or damage to
the inspiratory port and the expiratory port.
A
020
Increase the toppling stability during the

transportation of patients within the hospital
To ensure that the equipment cannot topple over,
the accessories must be moved to the most advan-
tageous position:
1 Hinged arm set to minimum deflection.
2 Hoses and cables hooked as close as possible
to the trolley.
3 Humidifier secured to the trolley, not to the lat-
eral rails of Babylog VN500.
Getting Started
Getting Started
Safety information on getting started. . . . . . 58

Prerequisites to getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching on Babylog VN500 and

Infinity C500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Select patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the settings of the previous patient. . . . . 59
Admission of a new patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting the breathing circuit and the

breathing gas humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Check readiness for operation . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Safety information on the system check. . . . . . 63
Starting the system check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Performing a device check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Performing the breathing circuit check . . . . . . . 66
Selecting Tube or NIV application mode . . . 68

Setting parameters for the tube . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Select therapy type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Start therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Displaying the status of accessories . . . . . . 71
Getting Started
Safety information on getting started
WARNING CAUTION
Ventilation does not take place in standby Condensation may form when the device is
mode! The device must only be set to standby moved from a cold storage location to a warm en-
mode when no patient is connected to the de- vironment. Do not switch on the device as other-
vice. Other settings may jeopardize the pa- wise its proper functioning may be adversely af-
tient! fected. Wait until the condensation has dried.
CAUTION
Before using for the first time, the device must re- Prerequisites to getting started
main connected to the mains power supply for at
least 4 hours so that the internal battery can be – Babylog VN500, Infinity C500, PS500 and
fully charged. GS500 are reprocessed and assembled ready
for operation.
– The electrical power supply and the gas supply
CAUTION
must be connected.
Before using the power supply unit PS500 for the – The toggle switches Babylog VN500 and
first time, the device must remain connected to PS500 are set to (on).
the mains power supply for at least 8 hours so that
the internal batteries can be fully charged.
Switching on Babylog VN500 and Infinity C500
z Press the (A) button on Infinity C500. Start

D
B C
116
Babylog VN500 provides you with two options:

– Use settings of previous patient (B)
A – Admit new patient (C)
017
The system is started. The Start dialog is dis- If the Start dialog is closed via the X (D) button,
played. Babylog VN500 adopts the settings of the previous
patient.
Getting Started
If a data loss occurs, the previous settings cannot

be recovered. The Current patient (B) button is not
displayed.
Select patient
Using the settings of the previous The button for starting the therapy (D) is preset for
patient 15 seconds. When the therapy is started, the set-
tings become effective.
Prerequisite: The Start dialog is opened.
Start Admission of a new patient
For a new patient, Babylog VN500 determines the

ventilation parameters’ start-up settings based on
the patient category (factory setting) or the body
A weight. The factory settings for the settings depen-
dent on patient category and weight can be
changed in the System setup dialog window.
The patient category or the body weight can only be
116
z Touch the Current patient (A) button. changed when a new patient is admitted. In the pa-
tient category Ped. pat., the body height is entered
The last used patient-related settings including the and from that the ideal body weight is determined.
alarm limits, application mode and device status In the Neo. patient category, the body weight is en-
are restored. tered directly. The weight-dependent setting for a
The Start/Standby (B) page is displayed. new patient is only possible after selecting Weight
Babylog VN500 is in standby mode. in the System setup dialog window.
The alarm limit start-up settings are recalculated
Start/Standby
according to the customized system configuration.
B
D When a new patient is admitted, the settings and
trend data of the previous patient are deleted.
C
092
Babylog VN500 displays the ventilation parameter

start-up settings (C).
Getting Started
Prerequisite: The Start dialog is opened. The ventilation parameters displayed in the lower
part of the page (F) are the start-up settings for the
Start
selected patient category.
Determining the start-up settings can take up to
5 seconds. No entries can be made during this
time.
A B
Ventilation parameter start-up settings by
body height/body weight
116
Prerequisite: In the System setup dialog window,

1 Touch the following button for a new patient: the Weight function was configured and a new pa-
– New Ped. pat. (A) for new pediatric patients tient was admitted.
– New Neo. (B) for new neonatal patients In the Ped. pat. patient category, the
The respective button turns yellow. Start/Standby page (C) contains the button for
body height (G) and the field for the ideal body
2 Confirm with the rotary knob. weight (H).
The Start/Standby page is displayed. Start/Standby
Babylog VN500 is in standby mode.
C
Ventilation parameter start-up settings by
patient category
The Start/Standby page (C) contains the buttons G H
for the patient category:
New Ped. pat. (D)

F
New Neo. (E) 106
Start/Standby 1 Touch the button for the body height (G).

C 2 Set the body height by turning the rotary knob
and push to confirm.
D E Babylog VN500 determines the start-up values for
VT, RR, Slope and Flow trigger based on the ideal
body weight calculated from the body height. The
values for VT and RR are displayed in the lower
part of the page (F). The other ventilation parame-
F ters displayed in the lower part of the page are start-
up settings for the selected patient category.
125
In the Neo. patient category, the patient’s body

1 Touch the button for the desired patient weight is set directly. The Start/Standby page (C)
category (D) or (E). contains the button for this start-up body weight (I).
2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
Getting Started
Start/Standby Additional information

C The configuration for the ventilation parameter
start-up values by body height/body weight or by
patient category is entered on the System setup >
Ventilation > Start settings page. See chapter
I J "Configuring start-up settings for the ventilation pa-
rameters" on page 153.
For information on configuring customized alarm
F limits, see chapter "Setting start-up values for alarm
limits" on page 149.
319
For information on starting the therapy, see "Start
1 Touch the button for the start-up body weight (I). therapy" on page 70.
2 Using the rotary knob, set the start-up body
weight and confirm the value.
The button for the current body weight (J) is dis-
played. After the patient has been admitted, the
current body weight corresponds to the start-up
body weight. If the current body weight is different
from the start-up body weight:
3 Touch the button for the current body weight (J).
4 Using the rotary knob, set the current body
weight and confirm the value.
Babylog VN500 determines the start-up values for
VT, RR, Slope and Flow trigger based on the
start-up body weight. The values for VT and RR are
displayed in the lower part of the page (F). The oth-
er ventilation parameters displayed in the lower part
of the page are start-up settings for the selected pa-
tient category.
By setting the current body weight, it is possible to
display the measured values relative to the body
weight, e.g., VT/kg BW.
Determining the start-up settings can take up to
3 seconds. No entries can be made during this
time.
Whenever the patient category has been

changed
Check the breathing circuit, see "Performing the
Getting Started
Selecting the breathing circuit and the breathing gas humidifier
The breathing circuit and the breathing gas If the breathing circuit used is not included in
humidifier can only be selected in standby mode. the selection list
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main 1 Touch the (B) button.
menu bar.
2 Select Other from the selection list.
2 Touch the Br. circuit/ Humidifier (A) tab.
The page for selecting the breathing circuit and the
4 Select the humidification type (E):
breathing gas humidifier is displayed.
– Active humid., exp. unheated
Start/Standby – Active humid., exp. heated
A – HME/Filter
B – None
Press the corresponding button.
C Infinity ID Breathing circuits

D
When using Infinity ID breathing circuits, the con-
nected hose type as well as the corresponding hu-
midification type are set automatically.
E If the message Infinity ID Breathing Circuit de-
080
tected is not displayed when connecting an

Infinity ID breathing circuit, then use a different
Selecting the breathing circuit from the
Infinity ID breathing circuit. If the message is still
selection list
not displayed, replace the Infinity ID neonatal expi-
3 Touch the (B) button. ratory valve or inspiratory valve.
4 Select the breathing circuit used from the selec-
tion list. Whenever the breathing circuit or the breathing
gas humidifier have been changed:
z Check the breathing circuit, see "Performing the
To help with the selection, the selected breathing
circuit is displayed as a detailed representation (C)
and also described as text (D).
Babylog VN500 automatically selects the corre-
sponding humidification type based on the breath-
ing circuit (E) selected. Some breathing circuits
provide the selection of HME/Filter and None.
Getting Started
Check readiness for operation
The system check consists of the device and Performing a device check
The device check is only possible in standby mode.
Safety information on the system check

Keep test lung ready
WARNING Pediatric test lung (8409742) for the pediatric and

neonatal breathing circuit
The device must not be put into operation if a
fault is discovered during the device and The test lung must only be inserted into the patient
breathing circuit check! Patient hazard! connector of the Y-piece after instruction by
Babylog VN500.
CAUTION
The device and breathing circuit check must be Starting the device check
carried out before use on the patient in order to
Prerequisite: The System check (A) page is
confirm that Babylog VN500 is operating cor-
opened.
rectly.
1 Touch the Device check (B) tab.
Start/Standby
Starting the system check
A
The system check is only possible in standby D
mode. B
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main
menu bar.
2 Touch the System check (A) tab.
C
Start/Standby
A
102
B Babylog VN500 displays the individual test steps in

a list (C). The size of the list depends on the avail-
able applications.
2 Touch the Start (D) button.
101
Babylog VN500 displays the date, time and results

of the last system check on the Overview (B) page.
Getting Started
Test steps in the device check Start/Standby

In the device check the following test steps are car-
ried out: J I
– Auxiliary acoustical alarm (test of auxiliary E
alarm/power failure alarm)
– Breathing circuit connection (visual inspection F G H
of breathing circuit)
– Inspect humidifier (visual inspection of breath-
ing gas humidifier)
– CO2 sensor calibration
– Neonatal flow sensor: Calibration
102
– Neonatal flow sensor: Measurement
– Test lung connection
– Gas supply sensors: Calibration The test steps in the device check are displayed
– O2 supply with the following symbols:
– Air supply
– GS500 (gas supply unit) (if the gas supply unit Rotating symbol : Active test step
function is activated) Green dot : Correct result
– Pressure sensor calibration valve
Red dot : Incorrect result
– Expiratory valve (expiratory valve check)
– Safety valve (safety function check) Colorless dot : Test step not carried out
– O2 sensor: Calibration
– Medication nebulizer (medication nebulizer
Repeating test steps in the device check
control check)
1 Touch the Repeat (I) button.
Device check procedure 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
Babylog VN500 guides the user in the form of a All test steps that have not yet been carried out or
question/answer dialog through the respective test that were unsuccessful are repeated.
step. The instruction field (E) displays the questions
or instructions how to carry out the test steps.
Aborting the device check
The questions must be answered by pressing the
1 Touch the Cancel (J) button.
Yes (F) or No (G) buttons.
The Next test (H) button can be used to skip the
test steps. The device check is also aborted when the Device
check page is exited. The device check can be
A test step is also skipped if the necessary prereq-
continued when the Device check page is called
uisites have not been met.
again.
1 Touch the Repeat (I) button.
Getting Started
Test results Test step Remedy

The test results obtained from the device check and GS500 (gas supply Check whether the gas
the calibration and zero-checking values of the sen- unit) connection to the device is
sors remain stored until the next calibration, even if kinked.
the device is switched off. Check whether the data ca-
ble is connected.Contact
Incorrect test steps and remedies DrägerService.
Errors in the following safety-relevant test steps Gas supply sensors: Check whether the com-
generate the medium-priority alarm message Calibration pressed gas hoses are con-
Device check failed: nected.
– Pressure sensor calibration valve O2 supply Check whether the O2 com-
– Expiratory valve pressed gas hose is con-
– Safety valve nected.
The alarm cannot be acknowledged. Do not start Air supply Check whether the Air com-
ventilation! pressed gas hose is con-
nected.
Errors in non-safety-relevant test steps or test steps
that are not carried out on account of a prerequisite Pressure sensor Connect the test lung.
generate the low-priority alarm message Device calibration valve Check the breathing circuit
check incomplete. for leaks.
Check whether the com-
The alarm causes and their remedies are displayed pressed gas hoses are con-
on the Current alarms page. nected.
The following table shows the remedies for elimi- Check whether the expira-
nating the errors during the device check: tory valve is properly en-
gaged.
Test step Remedy Expiratory valve Check whether the water
Auxiliary acoustical Contact DrägerService. trap is connected.
alarm Check whether the expira-
tory valve is properly en-
CO2 sensor Check whether the
gaged.
calibration CO2 sensor is connected.
Wait for the CO2 sensor to Safety valve Connect the test lung.
complete its three-minute Check the breathing circuit
warm-up phase. for leaks.
Check whether the Check whether the com-
CO2 sensor or the cuvette pressed gas hoses are con-
are soiled. nected.
Check whether the expira-
Neonatal flow Clean the flow sensor.
tory valve is properly en-
sensor: Calibration Keep flow sensor sealed
gaged.
during calibration.
Check whether the flow O2 sensor: Check whether the com-
sensor cable is connected. Calibration pressed gas hoses are con-
nected.
Getting Started
Test step Remedy CAUTION

Medication Check whether the If the quality of the oxygen from the central gas
nebulizer compressed gas hoses are supply is not sufficient, calibrate the O2 sensor
connected. with a corresponding calibration gas (100 % O2).
Otherwise this may result in an incorrect calibra-
z Eliminate the causes of the error and repeat the tion.
test step.
z If the test step is still incorrect, contact After the device check
DrägerService.
z Performing the breathing circuit check.
Inspiratory calibration
Inspiratory calibration takes approx. 2 minutes. Performing the breathing circuit check
This test step must be carried out every 3 months.
The test step can be skipped with No and is dis- The check is only possible in standby mode.
played as "successfully completed" (green dot). The breathing circuit check must be performed:
If the test step is skipped with Next test, the test – Device check
step is displayed as "not carried out" (colorless dot). – after changing the breathing circuit
– after changing the breathing gas humidifier
If a complete calibration is necessary after – after changing the patient category
3 months and the test step is skipped with Next
test, the test step is displayed as "failed" (red dot).
Test steps during the breathing circuit check
Calibrating the O2 sensor The following test steps are carried out:
– Leakage
The O2 sensor is calibrated during each device – Compliance
check. The regular calibration of the O2 sensor en- – Insp. Resistance
sures the specified accuracy. – Exp. Resistance
If the test step is skipped with Next test and the
O2 sensor is not calibrated for 3 months, the accu-
racy of the O2 sensor will be reduced. In the param-
eter field for FiO2 a question mark appears next to
the measured value. After calibration during the de-
vice check the sensor will work again with full accu-
racy. The measured value is displayed in the pa-
rameter field.
If the test step is skipped with Next test, the test
step is displayed as "not carried out" (colorless dot).
If Babylog VN500 requires the O2 sensor to be
calibrated and the test step is still skipped with
Next test, the test step is displayed as incorrect
(red dot).
Getting Started
Starting the breathing circuit check When the patient category is changed, the breath-
ing circuit that was last used in this category is se-
Prerequisite: The System check (A) page is
lected and the corresponding values for hose com-
opened.
pliance and hose resistance are used.
1 Touch the Breathing circ. check (B) tab.
The leakage measurement becomes invalid when
Start/Standby a new patient is admitted to the same patient cate-
gory. The values for hose resistance and hose com-
A
pliance are retained.
D
It is recommended to perform the breathing circuit
E
check before commencing patient ventilation with a
F B newly started device.
C Aborting the breathing circuit check

Start/Standby
103
The values of the last test are displayed (C). If a val- G

id measurement has not yet taken place, the stan-
dard values are displayed.
2 Touch the Start (D) button.
4 When requested by Babylog VN500 in the in-
struction field (E): seal the Y-piece or the neona-
103
tal flow sensor Y-piece, e.g., with a sterile glove.
Confirm with OK (F). 1 Touch the Cancel (G) button.
5 When requested, open the Y-piece or remove 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
the neonatal flow sensor Y-piece. Confirm with
The leakage measurement becomes invalid. The
OK (F).
values for hose resistance and hose compliance
The current leakage flow is displayed continuously are reset to the default values.
throughout the test. A leakage flow up to
300 mL/min at a pressure of 60 mbar (60 cmH2O)
Repeating the breathing circuit check
is permissible.
If the breathing circuit is changed after the breath-
After the leak test, Babylog VN500 determines the
ing circuit check, the humidification type or the pa-
compliance and the inspiratory and expiratory re-
tient category is changed, the breathing circuit
sistance of the breathing circuit.
check will have to be repeated.
When changing the breathing circuit and type of hu-
The breathing circuit check is also necessary when
midifier, Babylog VN500 automatically resets the
using Infinity ID breathing circuits.
values for hose compliance and hose resistance to
default values. When using Infinity ID breathing cir-
cuits, the default values of the breathing circuit de-
tected are used. The leakage measurement be-
comes invalid.
Getting Started
Selecting Tube or NIV application mode
Babylog VN500 can change between non-invasive Setting parameters for the tube
ventilation and tube ventilation.
The application mode can only be selected in The tube inside diameter and tube type can be en-
standby mode. tered for the following functions:
– Display of Ptrach, independent of ATC,
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main – Improvement of leakage compensation
menu bar. – Measurement of resistance R and
2 Touch the Tube/NIV (A) tab. compliance C
When the tube inside diameter and tube type are
Start/Standby
entered, the measured value R corresponds with
A the patient resistance. When the tube inside diam-
B C eter and tube type are not entered, the measured
value R corresponds with the total resistance.
Prerequisite: The Tube/NIV (A) page is opened.
The Tube application mode has been selected.
Start/Standby
A
113
3 Touch the Tube (B) or NIV (C) button.

B
Observe the information on changing the applica- C
tion mode! D
CAUTION
113
Application mode NIV must not be activated with

intubated patients.
Activating or deactivating the calculation of
tracheal pressure
WARNING
1 Touch the appropriate button (B).
Alarm limits and ventilation settings must be
checked or set again in order to ensure com- 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
plete monitoring of ventilation after changing
If ATC is switched off, the calculation of tracheal
from NIV application mode to Tube application
pressure is always deactivated when a new patient
mode.
is admitted.
For information on using the NIV application mode
for non-invasive ventilation, see "NIV – Non-inva-
sive ventilation" on page 82.
Getting Started
Selecting the tube type Entering the inside diameter

In the Neo. patient category, this selection is not 1 Touch the (D) button.
available.
2 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
1 Touch the appropriate button (C). push to confirm.
Select therapy type
Babylog VN500 can choose between the therapy

types Ventilation and O2 Therapy.
The therapy type can only be changed in standby
mode.
menu bar.
The Start/Standby (A) page is displayed.
Start/Standby
A
B C
126
2 Touch the Ventilation (B) or O2 Therapy (C)

button.
O2 Therapy, see page 100.
Setting ventilation, see page 74.
Getting Started
Start therapy
Before using on the patient Additional information

z Carry out a system check to ensure that The page for the ventilation settings can be opened
Babylog VN500 is operating correctly, with the Ventilation settings... (C) button.
see page 63.
z Check the therapy settings: For information on
setting alarm limits, see page 114. Setting ven-
tilation modes and ventilation parameters, see
"Setting ventilation" on page 74.
Starting ventilation or O2 therapy

menu bar.
The Start/Standby (A) page is displayed. The Start
(B) remains preset for 15 seconds.
Start/Standby
A
B
C
092

Babylog VN500 starts the therapy with the set ven-
tilation parameters. The main screen for ventilation
or O2 therapy is displayed.
When the Start button is no longer preset

After 15 seconds the Start button is no longer pre-
set.
1 Touch the Start (B) button.
Getting Started
Displaying the status of accessories

menu bar.
2 Touch the Accessory status tab.
Babylog VN500 displays the time until it is recom-
mended to exchange the accessories.
Sterilization of the Infinity ID expiratory valve or in-
spiratory valve may gradually impair the operation
of RFID transmission. This may mean that
Infinity ID breathing circuit functions may not work
or may no longer work reliably. The status for the
Infinity ID accessories is not displayed.
The time for the exchange interval can be config-
ured on the System setup > Exchange intervals
page. See "Exchange intervals" on page 161.
Operation
Operation
Setting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Fitting the Aeroneb Pro nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . 97

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Gas supply unit GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Opening the Ventilation settings dialog window 74
Selecting ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
O2 Therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setting ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Basic settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Safety information on O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . 100
Additional settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Preparing O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Switching on O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Setting FiO2 and flow for O2 therapy. . . . . . . . 101
Switching off O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Safety information on using NIV . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selecting the NIV application mode . . . . . . . . . 82
Starting NIV ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Activating standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setting ventilation parameters for NIV . . . . . . . 83 Continuing the therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Monitoring during NIV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ending operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Display curves and measured values. . . . . . 85
Storing Babylog VN500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing the screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Mains power supply / DC power supply . . . 105
Changing the display of monitoring fields. . . . . 85
Evaluating loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Power supply unit PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Freeze waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fault – Cause – Remedy on PS500 . . . . . . . . 109
Smart Pulmonary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Oxygen enrichment for suction

maneuver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Before suction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic interruption of oxygen enrichment . . 91
After reconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Manual inspiration – Manual inspiration/hold92
Medication nebulization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Safety information on medication nebulization . 93
Preparing the pneumatic medication nebulizer 93
Connecting the medication nebulizer to the
breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Switching on medication nebulization. . . . . . . . 95
Aborting medication nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Required steps after medication nebulization. . 97
Operation
Setting ventilation
Overview The page for the active ventilation mode (D) with
the Basic settings (F) appears by default. The cor-
This chapter describes how to set ventilation responding therapy controls (E) are displayed.
modes and basic settings as well as additional set- The tab for Additional settings (G) can be used to
tings for ventilation parameters. supplement the active ventilation mode with addi-
For a detailed description of the ventilation modes tional settings.
and ventilation parameters, see chapter "Descrip-
tion of the ventilation modes" on page 236 and "Ad-
ditional settings for ventilation" on page 249. D
F
G
Opening the Ventilation settings dialog E
window
083
The Ventilation settings dialog window can be
opened as follows:
Selecting ventilation modes
z Touch the Ventilation settings... button (A) in
the main menu bar. Prerequisite: The Basic settings (A) page is
z Touch the (B) button in the therapy bar. opened.
z Touch the displayed ventilation mode (C) in the Ventilation settings
header bar.
B B B B C
C A
1 2 3
A
083
The Ventilation settings dialog window contains

5 tabs for selecting the ventilation modes. 4 tabs
(B) have ventilation modes permanently assigned
to them. The fifth tab (C) can be used to select an-
other ventilation mode, which can be selected from
B the available ventilation modes.
078
Babylog VN500 opens the Ventilation settings di- The following 4 ventilation modes are preset at the
alog window. factory:
– PC-CMV
– PC-AC
– PC-SIMV
– PC-PSV
Operation
For information on changing the assignment of ven- Setting ventilation parameters

tilation modes, see "Configuring start-up settings
for the ventilation modes" on page 152. Prerequisite: The Basic settings (A) page is
opened.
Selecting an additional ventilation mode in the Ventilation settings D
dialog window
1 Touch the Other modes (D) tab.
A
Ventilation settings B
C D
C
E
131
1 Touch the corresponding therapy control, e.g.,
(B).
170
All the available ventilation modes (E) are dis- push to confirm.
played. The additional ventilation parameters derived from
2 Touch the button for the corresponding ventila- the ventilation parameter are calculated by
tion mode. The color of the (D) tab turns yellow. Babylog VN500 and displayed in the setting assis-
tance field (C).
Information is displayed in the message field (D),
The additional ventilation mode is displayed in the e.g., when the setting limit of a parameter has been
fifth tab (C). The ventilation mode is active. reached.
Changing the ventilation mode Setting ventilation parameters in the therapy

bar
F The ventilation parameters of the active ventilation
mode can also be set with the therapy controls in
the therapy bar (E).
077
1 Touch the corresponding tab, e.g., (F). The col-

or of the tab turns yellow.
E
078
2 Preset the ventilation parameters if necessary.

3 Confirm with the rotary knob. The color of the
tab turns dark green.
"Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation parameter"
The ventilation mode is active. The settings are ap-
plied to the patient. on page 35.
"Direct setting of ventilation parameters (Quick-
Set)" on page 35.
Operation
"Linked setting of ventilation parameters"

on page 35.
Basic settings for ventilation
The basic settings of the ventilation parameters are

listed in the following tables:
– Pressure-controlled ventilation modes
– Spontaneous breathing support
WARNING
If flow measurement is deactivated for SPN-
CPAP with the use of a nasopharyngeal tube,
use a separate monitoring device.
CAUTION
Only remove the water trap of the expiratory valve
briefly during ventilation. Otherwise, ventilation
will be impaired.
Operation
Pressure-controlled ventilation modes
Ventilation Ventilation mode

parameters PC-SIMV PC-AC PC-CMV PC-APRV PC-MMV PC-PSV PC-HFO
FiO2 X X X X X X X
VT X1) X1) X1) X X1)
Ti X X X X
RR X X X X X
Slope or X X X X X X
Insp. flow2)
Pmax X3) X3) X3) X3) X3) X3)
Pinsp X4) X4) X4) X4)
PEEP X X X X X
ΔPsupp X X
Timax X5)
Thigh X
Tlow X6)
Phigh X
Plow X
Tlow max X7)
Exp. term. X7)
I:Ehf X
fhf X
Ampl hf X
MAPhf X
1) if VG is switched on
2) depending on configuration, Slope adjustment
3) if Pmax/Paw high autoset is activated and ATC or VG is switched on
4) if VG is switched off
5) in the Neo. patient category in the Tube application mode, or in the Ped. pat. patient category in the NIV application mode
6) If AutoRelease is switched off
7) if AutoRelease is switched on
Operation
Spontaneous breathing support
Ventilation Ventilation mode

parameters SPN-CPAP/PS SPN-CPAP/VS SPN-CPAP1) SPN-PPS
FiO2 X X X X
VT X
Timax X2) X2) X2)
Slope or X X X
Insp. flow3)
Pmax X4) X4) X4)
PEEP X X X X
ΔPsupp X
Vol. Assist X
Flow Assist X
TmanInsp X
PmanInsp X
1) only available in the Neo. patient category in the NIV application mode
2) in the NIV application mode or in the Neo. patient category
3) depending on configuration, Slope adjustment
4) if Pmax/Paw high autoset is activated
Operation
Additional settings for ventilation
Overview of possible supplementary settings

The ventilation modes can be combined with addi-
tional settings to optimize ventilation. The table
shows the possible additional settings for the re-
spective ventilation mode.
Ventilation Additional settings

mode Apnea Trigger Sigh ATC Volume Auto HFO- Volume
Ventilation Guaran- Release Sigh Guarantee
tee (HFO)
PC-CMV X X X
PC-AC X X X X
PC-SIMV X X X X X
PC-PSV X X X X
PC-MMV X X X X
PC-APRV X X X
SPN-CPAP/PS X X X
SPN-CPAP/VS X X X
SPN-PPS X X X
PC-HFO X X
Setting the supplementary settings The page for setting the corresponding parameters
is opened.
Prerequisite: The page with the active ventilation
mode is open. Ventilation settings
1 Touch the Additional settings (A) tab.
The additional settings of the active ventilation
mode are displayed. C C
D D D
098
B 3 Use the (C) buttons to activate or deactivate the

A additional setting.
4 Touch the corresponding therapy control (D).
084
2 Touch the tab of the respective additional set- push to confirm.

ting (B).
Operation
Ventilation parameters of the additional

settings
CAUTION
High trigger sensitivity may lead to auto-triggering
of the ventilator.
Additional settings Ventilation parameters Dependencies, information

Apnea Ventilation On/Off
VTapn
RRapn
Pmax If Pmax/Paw high autoset is configured
PEEP In PC-APRV
Flow trigger In PC-APRV
Slope In SPN-PPS
Configuration of the Automatic return from Apnea
Ventilation function, see "Configuring general set-
tings" on page 158. Description, see "Automatic re-
turn from apnea ventilation" on page 249.
Trigger Flow trigger
Sigh On/Off
ΔintPEEP
Interval sigh
Cycles sigh
ATC On/Off See chapter "Configuration" on page 141.
Tube type (ET/Trach.) only available in the Ped. pat. patient category
Tube Ø Inside diameter of tube
Compens. Degree of compensation:
Compens. = 100 % – airway pressure regulation to
the tracheal level
Volume Guarantee On/Off See chapter "Configuration" on page 141
VT
Pinsp If VG is switched off
AutoRelease On/Off
Exp. term.
Tlow If AutoRelease is switched off
Tlow max If AutoRelease is switched on
HFO-Sigh Psigh
RRsigh
Tisigh
Flowsigh If Insp. flow is configured, see page 158
Slopesigh If Slope is configured, see page 158
Operation
Additional settings Ventilation parameters Dependencies, information

Volume Guarantee On/Off
(HFO) VThf
Ampl hf Set the amplitude before switching off the Volume
Guarantee (HFO)
For a detailed description of the additional settings,
see in chapter "Additional settings for ventilation"
on page 249.
Operation
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation
Overview NOTE
Use suitable masks and prongs. Otherwise too
Babylog VN500 can be used for the ventilation of high leakages may occur.
intubated patients (application mode Tube) and for
non-invasive ventilation (application mode NIV).
WARNING
This chapter describes the use of non-invasive ven- Avoid high airway pressures. Danger of aspi-
tilation in the NIV application mode. ration!
The following ventilation modes can be selected in
the NIV application mode: WARNING
Alarm limits and ventilation settings must be
Ventilation mode Patient category
checked or set again in order to ensure com-
Ped. pat. Neo. plete monitoring of ventilation after changing
PC-CMV X X from NIV application mode to Tube application
PC-AC X mode.
PC-SIMV X Automatic tube compensation (ATC) which is acti-

PC-PSV X vated in Tube application mode is ineffective in NIV
PC-MMV X application mode.
PC-APRV X
SPN-CPAP X Selecting the NIV application mode
SPN-CPAP/PS X
SPN-CPAP/VS X The application mode can only be selected in
standby mode.
SPN-PPS X
When the PC-HFO ventilation mode is set, it is not menu bar.
possible to switch to the NIV application mode.
Babylog VN500 opens the Start/Standby dialog
window. The Start/Standby page appears by de-
fault.
Safety information on using NIV
2 Touch the Standby button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
CAUTION
Application mode NIV must not be activated with Babylog VN500 is in standby mode.
intubated patients!
CAUTION
Use of masks increases the dead space. Note the
mask manufacturer's instructions!
Operation
3 Touch the Tube/NIV (A) tab. Babylog VN500 starts the therapy with the set ven-
tilation parameters. The main screen for ventilation
Start/Standby
is displayed.
A
B
Setting ventilation parameters for NIV
z Set the ventilation parameters as described

under "Setting ventilation parameters"
on page 75.
Therapy control Timax
113
The therapy control Timax (A) limits the maximum
4 Touch the NIV (B) button and confirm with the duration of supported breaths (Pressure Support,
rotary knob. Volume Support, PPS) because the inspiratory ter-
mination criterion may be ineffective with very high
Babylog VN500 is in the NIV application mode.
leakages.
Babylog VN500 displays the symbol in the
header bar Ventilation settings
In the Neo. patient category, flow monitoring is de-
activated.
A
Starting NIV ventilation
105
Prerequisite: The Start/Standby dialog window is
opened. z Set the value for Timax by turning the rotary
knob and push to confirm.
1 Touch the Start/Standby (A) tab.
Start/Standby Therapy controls TmanInsp and PmanInsp
A Prerequisite: The Neo. patient category and the
B SPN-CPAP ventilation mode are set.
C
339
092
The Start (B) button remains preset for During manual inspiration, the duration of the man-
15 seconds. datory breath is determined by the TmanInsp ther-
apy control (B).
Operation
During manual inspiration, the pressure of the man-

datory breath is determined by the PmanInsp ther-
apy control (C).
z Set and confirm the relevant values using the
rotary knob.
Monitoring during NIV
z Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2,

if necessary.
A time-lag Tdisconnect between 0 and
60 seconds can be set for the lower alarm limit of
the airway pressure.
"Setting the alarm limits" on page 114.
Operation
Display curves and measured values
Overview The fields can be standard or double in size. The in-

formation that can be displayed depends on the
This chapter describes how curves and measured size of the fields:
values are displayed on the main screen as well as Parameter fields
how to change the screen views during operation.
Standard size Single parameter
Two parameters
Changing the screen view Short trend for measured
values
Babylog VN500 displays a preconfigured view on
Short trend for setting
the main screen.
values
3 views can be grouped together specifically for the
Double size Single parameter
hospital concerned in the System setup dialog
window. Parameter group
Loop
Short trend for measured
Displaying other views
values
z Touch the Views... button in the main menu
1 2 3
Short trend for setting

bar. values
The screen displays the second view .
1 2 3
Curve fields
z Touch the Views... button.
1 2 3
Standard size Single curve

The screen displays the third view .
1 2 3
Trend for measured values

Trend for setting values
Changing the display of monitoring Tabular trend
fields Multi-trend
Alarm history
Double size Single curve
1 2 3
Single loop
A Double loop
Trend for measured values
Trend for setting values
B Tabular trend
Multi-trend
Alarm history
Smart Pulmonary View
115
The parameters can be displayed in parameter

fields (A) and in the curve field (B).
Operation
Selecting the display of parameter fields Selecting the display of curve fields
1 Touch the parameter field. 1 Touch the curve field.
The selected parameter field is marked. The selected curve field is marked. Babylog VN500
Babylog VN500 opens the dialog for the contents of opens the dialog for the contents of the curve field.
the parameter field.
2 Proceed as described under "Selecting the dis-
Content play of parameter fields".
E
"Configuring the screen view" on page 144.
F "Factory-set screen views" on page 275.
C D Evaluating loops
107
500.0
Selecting the field size 450.0

A
2 Touch the 1x (C) button for standard size or 400.0
C
2x (D) for double size. 350.0 B
300.0 D E
250.0
Selecting the display format
200.0
3 Touch the (E) button. 150.0
The selection list for the display of parameters is 100.0
displayed according to the selected size of the pa- 50.0
rameter field. 0.0

-5.0 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
112
4 Select the display format and confirm with the

rotary knob.
Displaying a reference loop
Selecting the parameter z Touch the Ref. (A) button.
5 Touch the (F) button. A loop is recorded and displayed as a reference

loop.
The selection list for the displayable parameters is
displayed. The date and the time of the loop appear beside the
(A) button. The reference loop is drawn in black.
6 Select the parameter and confirm with the rota- The reference loop remains displayed until the Ref.
ry knob. (A) button is touched again.
Closing the dialog Recording the current loop in order to freeze,

7 Touch the X button. The dialog is closed. display and save it afterwards
z Touch the Capture loop (B) button.
Operation
The current loop is frozen. The loops are drawn in z Touch the Freeze waveforms button in the
blue. After "freezing", a cursor (C) is displayed main menu bar.
which can be moved with the rotary knob. The re-
spective values are displayed (D).
Recording up to 10 loops of automatic or spon-

taneous breaths A
1 Touch the Draw (E) button.
2 Set how many loops should be recorded with
the rotary knob and push to confirm.
The set number is displayed in the button.
The contrast with which loops are displayed de-
creases depending how far back the recording was
145
made.
The current curves are immediately frozen. The
cursor (A) displays the time of "freezing" and the
Additional information value at the cursor position.
A grid only appears if loops are displayed in the To display a measured value at a certain moment in
complete curve field. time:
z Position the cursor on the time with the rotary
Freeze waveforms knob.
The measured value or the measured value pair
The Freeze waveforms function can be configured are displayed above the curve.
as a button in the main menu bar to enable direct
access. See "Assigning functions to additional but-
tons" on page 146.
Operation
Smart Pulmonary View Calibrating Smart Pulmonary View:

z Touch the Calibrate (E) button.
Smart Pulmonary View is a graphic display of the
compliance and resistance as well as of the spon- The display range is adapted to the current mea-
taneous and mandatory minute volume. sured values. The measured values from the last
calibration are displayed as a broken line.
A double-size curve field must be configured in or-
der to display Smart Pulmonary View. See "Config-
uring the screen view" on page 144. Additional information
For a detailed description, see "Smart Pulmonary
View" on page 262.
B
E
A
316
A The movement of the diaphragm indicates syn-

chronized mandatory breaths or supported
(triggered) breaths.
B The blue line around the trachea indicates the
resistance R. The higher the resistance, the
thicker the line. The value is also displayed.
C The blue line around the lungs indicates the
compliance Cdyn. The higher the compliance,
the thinner the line. The value is also displayed.
D Diagram displaying the relationship between
spontaneous breathing and mandatory ventila-
tion. The following parameters are displayed in
different colors:
– VTspon and RRspon
– VTmand and RRmand
Smart Pulmonary View must be calibrated for each
new patient. If the measured values for R and Cdyn
are outside the current display range, a red line ap-
pears and calibration is required. Babylog VN500
displays the following information Calibrate lung
display.
Operation
Help
WARNING Opening Help in the dialog window

Risk of operating error. The Help function can also be opened in the follow-
The Help function is not a substitute for the In- ing dialog windows:
structions for Use. The Instructions for Use – Ventilation settings
must be observed to ensure safe operation. – Special procedures > Med. nebulization
– Special procedures > Functions
The Help function can be configured as a button in
the main menu bar to enable direct access. See Ventilation settings
"Assigning functions to additional buttons" G H
on page 146.
Opening Help
z Touch the Help button in the main menu bar.
171
Help z Touch the button (G) in the relevant dialog
F
A B C D E window.
The appropriate section of the Help is displayed.
Closing Help
Touch the (G) or the (H) button in the relevant
dialog window.
318
The following buttons are available in the Help dia-

log window:
– Home (A) to open the start page
– (B) to scroll back
– (C) to scroll forward
– Content (D) to open the table of contents
– Index (E) to open the index
z Touch the appropriate button.
Closing Help
z Touch the (F) button.
Operation
Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver
Overview 2 Touch the Functions (A) button if the page is

not already preset.
To avoid any risk of hypoxia during endotracheal
Special procedures
suction, Babylog VN500 offers a program for oxy-
gen enrichment. A
The O2 concentration is increased to the current in-
spiratory O2 concentration, multiplied by a factor.
The factor can be configured, see page 158.
After the oxygen enrichment program is started, B
Babylog VN500 ventilates the patient for an initial
oxygen enrichment phase of max. 180 seconds
with an increased O2 concentration. During this
time, Babylog VN500 waits for a disconnection.
081
When the device is disconnected for suction,
3 Touch the O2 suction (B) button and confirm
Babylog VN500 interrupts ventilation. During the
with the rotary knob.
suction phase, the acoustic alarms are suppressed
so that the suction maneuver is not disturbed. The oxygen enrichment program is started.
After suction and automatically recognized recon- Babylog VN500 continues ventilating in the set
nection, Babylog VN500 delivers an increased ventilation mode with an increased
O2 concentration for the final oxygen enrichment O2 concentration:
phase of 120 seconds. 1 to 2-fold of the current FiO2 concentration
During suction and for 2 minutes afterwards, the If PEEP is not set to more than 4 mbar (4 cmH2O),
lower alarm limit for the minute volume is switched PEEP will be applied automatically at 4 mbar
off. (4 cmH2O). This PEEP allows Babylog VN500 to
detect any subsequent disconnection. The other
Initial and final oxygen enrichment are only possi-
ventilation parameters remain unaffected.
ble with a fully functioning flow sensor and if flow
monitoring is switched on! Screen display:
WARNING C
Select an appropriate suction catheter for suc- 1 2 3
tion. Otherwise this may result in a too high

negative pressure.
078
The (C) field in the header bar continuously dis-

plays the initial oxygen enrichment phase with the
Before suction remaining time in seconds.
1 Touch the Special procedures... button in the Initial oxygen enrichment lasts for a maximum of
main menu bar. 180 seconds. During this time Babylog VN500
waits for a disconnection for suction. The oxygen
Babylog VN500 opens the Special procedures di-
alog window.
Operation
enrichment program is terminated by

Babylog VN500 if there is no disconnection after
the 180 seconds have elapsed.
After disconnection for suction, Babylog VN500 de-
livers a minimal flow for the duration of disconnec-
tion in order to detect automatically the end of the
disconnection phase. 120 seconds are available for
suctioning. In the header bar, the disconnection
phase with the remaining time available for suction
is displayed continuously in seconds (C). If suction
is ended and the system is reconnected within the
displayed time, Babylog VN500 terminates the dis-
connection phase.
Automatic interruption of oxygen

enrichment
If there is no reconnection when the available time

(120 seconds) has elapsed, the oxygenation proce-
dure is terminated. All alarms are immediately reac-
tivated. Babylog VN500 immediately continues
ventilating in the set ventilation mode.
After reconnection
After reconnection, Babylog VN500 continues ven-

tilating in the set ventilation mode, except that for
120 seconds a correspondingly increased
O2 concentration will continue to be delivered for fi-
nal oxygen enrichment.
In the header bar, the remaining time available for
the final oxygen enrichment phase is displayed
continuously in seconds.
Aborting oxygen enrichment

z Touch the O2 suction button again.
The Suction maneuver function can be configured
as a O2 suction button in the main menu bar to en-
able direct access. See "Assigning functions to ad-
ditional buttons" on page 146.
Operation
Manual inspiration – Manual inspiration/hold
The Manual inspiration/hold function can be acti- – After a maximum of 40 seconds in the Ped. pat.
vated in all ventilation modes and offers the follow- patient category
ing options: – After a maximum of 5 seconds in the Neo. pa-
tient category
– Between two automatic breaths, a breath can
be manually started and held. The pattern of the WARNING
manually started breath corresponds to the ven-
The Manual inspiration/hold function must not
tilation pattern of the currently active automatic
be used during endotracheal suction. Other-
ventilation mode.
wise negative pressure may jeopardize the pa-
– Regardless of the start time, an automatic tient.
breath can be prolonged.
1 Touch the Special procedures... button in the Additional information
main menu bar.
The Manual inspiration/hold function can be con-
Babylog VN500 opens the Special procedures di- figured as a Man. insp./hold button in the main
alog window. menu bar to enable direct access. See "Assigning
2 Touch the Functions (A) button if the page is functions to additional buttons" on page 146.
not already preset.
Special procedures
A
B
081
Triggering manual inspiration

z Briefly touch the Man. insp./hold button (B).
Manually extending inspiration

z Touch and hold the Man. insp./hold (B) button
for the desired inspiratory time.
Babylog VN500 triggers an extended breath or ex-
tends an already triggered automatic breath.
Babylog VN500 automatically ends inspiration:
Operation
Medication nebulization
Safety information on medication Installing the pneumatic medication nebulizer

nebulization Medication nebulization is possible in the pressure-
controlled ventilation modes.
WARNING The medication nebulizer nebulizes continuously.
Inflammable agents must not be nebulized! But the aerosol generated during expiration does
They may be ignited by the glowing flow sen- not reach the lungs.
sor.
The medication nebulizer is supplied with medical
gas according to the set O2 concentration. Small
CAUTION
deviations in the inspiratory O2 concentration up to
During medication nebulization, do not use a heat ±4 Vol% are possible. For respiratory rates above
and moisture exchanger (HME) at the Y-piece. 12/min, refer to the graph on page 261.
The medication will not be adequately adminis-
tered to the patient. In order to avoid false alarms and ensure monitor-
ing:
CAUTION z Use additional monitoring, e.g. SpO2, if neces-
Do not place a bacterial filter on the nebulizer out- sary.
let during nebulization! Bacterial filters may in-
crease the flow resistance and impair ventilation.
Preparing the pneumatic medication
CAUTION nebulizer
Remove the medication nebulizer after use. Acci-
Only use pneumatic medication nebulizer 8411030.
dental medication nebulization may impair venti-
lation.
CAUTION
In order to ensure limitation of the nebulizer flow,
CAUTION only use pneumatic medication nebulizer
Surplus nebulized medication can affect the ambi- 8411030.
ent air.
z Prepare the medication nebulizer in accordance
NOTE with the corresponding Instructions for Use.
Aerosols can impair the proper functioning of the
expiratory valve. When using medication nebuliza-
tion, shorten the reprocessing cycles for the expi-
ratory valve.
Operation
Connecting the medication nebulizer to When using on the incubator

the breathing circuit
C B A
024
321
1 Insert the catheter connector (A) in the inlet port
of the medication nebulizer. z Push the outlet port of the medication nebulizer
2 Insert the adapter (B) in the outlet port of the into the upper hose guide of the incubator.
medication nebulizer.
3 Fit the corrugated hose (C), length 0.13 m When using without incubator
(5.1 inches), to the adapter (B).
E A D
025
4 Remove the corrugated hose of the breathing
322
circuit (D) from the inspiratory port of the
1 Press the inlet or outlet port of the medication
Y-piece and connect it to the catheter connector
nebulizer into one side of the clip and the expi-
(A).
ratory hose into the other.
5 Connect the free end of the corrugated hose (E)
2 Place the medication nebulizer in the vertical
to the inspiratory port of the Y-piece.
position.
For the order numbers of catheter connector (A)
and adapter (B), see the list of accessories.
Operation
Connecting the nebulizer hose Special procedures

A
WARNING
The nebulizer port (F) must be used for nebu- B C
lization only! Otherwise the proper function-
ing of the device may be disrupted and the pa-
tient endangered.
z Connect the nebulizer hose (G) to the nebulizer

port (F).
086
3 Touch the button for the desired nebulization
time (B).
Nebulization can be set for 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes.
Deactivating neonatal flow monitoring

Special procedures
F A
323
064
z Touch the Off button (D) and confirm with the

z Fill the medication nebulizer in accordance with rotary knob.
the corresponding Instructions for Use.
CAUTION Removing the neonatal flow sensor from the

Check the correct functioning of the medication breathing circuit
nebulizer. Check whether aerosol is generated. Special procedures
A medication nebulizer fault is not detected by
Babylog VN500. A
Switching on medication nebulization E
1 Touch the Special procedures... button in the

main menu bar.
327
2 Touch the Med. nebulization (A) tab.
Operation
WARNING
Fire hazard!
H
Before medication nebulization, remove the
neonatal flow sensor from the Y-piece. I
The wires of the neonatal flow sensor are hot.
If the flow sensor is left in the breathing circuit
during nebulization, medication aerosol de-
posits may build up and impair flow measure-
ment. In the worst case, these deposits could
catch fire!
305
Disconnecting the neonatal flow sensor cable 2 Remove the insert (H).
is not sufficient to prevent this.
3 Insert the sealing plug (I) (8411024). The seal-
The minute volume is not monitored without ing plug is a component of the medication neb-
the neonatal flow sensor and apnea monitor- ulizer.
ing is limited. Use additional monitoring.
When using the ISO 15 neonatal flow sensor
When using the Y-piece with integrated neonatal (8411130):
flow sensor (8410185):
F
J
K
G
304
306
1 Disconnect the cable (F) from the neonatal flow 1 Remove the flow sensor (J) (housing and insert)
sensor (G). from the Y-piece.
2 Connect the tube catheter cone (K) to the
Y-piece.
z Replace or clean the neonatal flow sensor if
there is visible soiling. See "Dismantling neona-
tal flow sensor" on page 194.
After removing the neonatal flow sensor:
z Touch the Done (E) button.
Babylog VN500 starts nebulization. The sym-
bol and the remaining nebulization time is dis-
played in the screen header bar.
Operation
Babylog VN500 automatically switches off the Fitting the Aeroneb Pro nebulizer
medication nebulizer after the set nebulization time
has elapsed. z Observe the Instructions for Use of the
A message indicating that nebulization has been Aeroneb Pro nebulizer.
ended appears in the screen header bar. z Observe the "Safety information for the use of
HMEs, bacterial filters and breathing circuits"
on page 45.
Aborting medication nebulization
z Observe the "Safety information on medication
nebulization" on page 93.
z Touch the Cancel (C) button.
z Do not switch on the Med. nebulization func-
tion on Babylog VN500 as the Aeroneb Pro
Required steps after medication nebulizer does not require a nebulizer flow from
nebulization Babylog VN500.
1 Remove any residual medication. Observe the Before nebulization with Aeroneb Pro
Instructions for Use of the medication nebulizer.
1 Deactivate neonatal flow monitoring.
2 If a bacterial filter is used to protect the expira- See "Deactivating neonatal flow monitoring"
tory valve, exchange or remove the bacterial fil- on page 137.
ter.
2 Remove the neonatal flow sensor from the
3 Re-insert the neonatal flow sensor in the breathing circuit. See "Removing the neonatal
Y-piece. flow sensor from the breathing circuit"
4 Activate neonatal flow monitoring. See "Activat- on page 95.
ing neonatal flow monitoring" on page 138.
WARNING
5 When using a new neonatal flow sensor, cali- Fire hazard!
brate the flow sensor. See "Neonatal flow sen-
sor calibration" on page 129. Before medication nebulization, remove the
neonatal flow sensor from the Y-piece.
The wires of the neonatal flow sensor are hot.
If the flow sensor is left in the breathing circuit
during nebulization, medication aerosol de-
posits may build up and impair flow measure-
ment. In the worst case, these deposits could
catch fire!
Disconnecting the cable from the neonatal
flow sensor is not sufficient to prevent this.
The minute volume is not monitored without
the neonatal flow sensor and apnea monitor-
ing is limited! Use additional monitoring.
Operation
After nebulization with Aeroneb Pro

1 If a bacterial filter is used to protect the expira-
tory valve, exchange or remove the bacterial fil-
ter.
2 Re-insert the neonatal flow sensor in the
Y-piece.
3 Activate neonatal flow monitoring. See "Activat-
ing neonatal flow monitoring" on page 138.
4 When using a new neonatal flow sensor, cali-
brate the flow sensor. See "Neonatal flow sen-
sor calibration" on page 129.
z For the order number of the nebulizer
Aeroneb Pro, see the list of accessories.
Operation
Babylog VN500 can be equipped with the GS500 gas supply, Babylog VN500 displays an alarm mes-
gas supply unit in order to ensure the air supply to sage. The gas supply unit starts the supply of air af-
the device in the event of failure of the central gas ter 4 seconds at the latest.
supply and during the transportation of patients
Switching on the gas supply unit for the transporta-
within the hospital.
tion of patients within the hospital:
When Babylog VN500 is supplied from the GS500
1 Touch the Special procedures... button in the
gas supply unit, the inspiratory O2 concentration
main menu bar.
may deviate from the set FiO2.
2 Touch the Transport (B) tab.
Installing the bacterial filter 3 Touch the On (C) button.
CAUTION Special procedures
In order to protect the patient from contamination B

through the aspirated ambient air, an inspiratory C D
bacterial filter must always be used.
325
4 Detach the connectors of the compressed gas
hoses from the wall outlets of the central gas
supply.
A If the connectors of the compressed gas hoses
have not been detached within 5 minutes of the gas
supply unit being switched on, Babylog VN500
switches off the gas supply unit.
Switching off the gas supply unit:
342
z Fit the bacterial filter (A) onto the inspiratory 5 Touch the Off (D) button.
port.
Using the gas supply unit
z Deactivating functionality of the gas supply unit,
Prerequisite: Functionality of the gas supply unit is see "Device extensions" on page 164.
activated, see "Device extensions" on page 164.
In the event of failure of the central gas supply, or if
the connectors of the compressed gas hoses be-
come detached from the wall outlets of the central
Operation
O2 Therapy
Safety information on O2 therapy Preparing the system with Fisher & Paykel
MR 850 breathing gas humidifier
During the O2 therapy, only the O2 concentration
and the inspiratory pressure are monitored.
Oxygen masks, hoods, or nasal cannulas can be
used for O2 therapy. A
CAUTION
Only use oxygen masks for the O2 therapy. Do not
use masks for non-invasive ventilation (NIV). Use
of unsuitable masks may jeopardize the patient.
B
CAUTION B
Internal monitoring is deactivated. Airway pres-
sure and ventilation parameters, e.g., flow, minute
volume or apnea are not monitored. Use external
SpO2 monitoring for patients who are dependent
037
on an increased defined O2 concentration. Other-
wise a worsening of the patient's condition cannot 1 Hang the hinged arm (A) on the rail and tighten
be detected. the screws. Depending on the desired position
of the device in relation to the bed, the hinged
arm can be fitted to either side of the device.
Preparing O2 therapy 2 Fit the breathing hoses (B) for inspiration. The
expiratory ports on the device and on the
Y-piece remain open!
Attaching breathing hoses
3 Switch on Babylog VN500. See page 58.
WARNING
4 Switch Babylog VN500 to standby. See
Do not use antistatic or conductive breathing
page 102.
hoses. The use of these materials increases
the danger of electric shock to the patient and 5 Switch on O2 monitoring. See page 138.
of fire in an oxygen-enriched environment.
The alarm limits for MV, Paw, RR, Tapn are not ac-
tive. The alarm limits for O2 monitoring are auto-
matically set by the device.
Operation
Switching on O2 therapy
G
1 2 3
The O2 therapy can only be switched on in standby

mode.
menu bar.
window. The Start/Standby (A) page appears by
default.
2 Touch the Standby (B) button and confirm with F
109
the rotary knob.
During the O2 therapy, the screen display on the
Babylog VN500 is in standby mode. main screen cannot be customized.
Start/Standby D
A
Setting FiO2 and flow for O2 therapy
E B
1 2 3
C
C
108
3 Touch the O2 Therapy (C) button.

A B
The message field (D) displays the information to D
109
use specific masks for the O2 therapy.
1 Touch the corresponding therapy control in the
4 Connecting a mask, hood, or nasal cannula for
therapy bar:
O2 therapy.
– FiO2 (A)
5 Touch the Start (E) button and confirm with the – Flow (B)
rotary knob.
O2 therapy is switched on. Babylog VN500 displays push to confirm.
the main screen with the therapy bar (F) for the
The FiO2 concentration is represented graphically
O2 therapy. The header bar (G) displays the mes-
(C).
sage O2 Therapy.
Operation
Setting O2 and flow in the dialog window Switching off O2 therapy

The O2 and flow can also be set in the Ventilation
settings dialog window. 1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button.
z Touch the Ventilation settings... button. Babylog VN500 opens the Start/Standby dialog
window. The Start/Standby page appears by de-
Or fault.
z Touch the (D) button. 2 Touch the Standby button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
Babylog VN500 is in standby mode. The
O2 therapy is switched off The therapy type can be
switched to ventilation.
Standby mode
Switch to standby mode for the following actions: Start/Standby

– Keep Babylog VN500 ready for operation while
the patient is absent
A
– Change the therapy type between ventilation B
and O2 therapy
– Change the patient category
– Change the application mode
– Perform the device and breathing circuit check
– Switch off Babylog VN500
WARNING
Ventilation does not take place in standby
113
mode! The device must only be set to standby

2 Touch the Standby (B) button and confirm with
mode when no patient is connected to the de-
the rotary knob.
vice. Other settings may jeopardize the pa-
tient! The message Standby mode activated is dis-
played in the header bar.
3 Touch the ALARM RESET button in the header
Activating standby mode bar and confirm with the rotary knob.
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main Babylog VN500 is in standby mode. Standby is
menu bar. displayed in the screen header bar.

window. The Start/Standby (A) page appears by
default.
Operation
Continuing the therapy 2 Touch the Start (C) button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
1 Check the ventilation settings (A) of the current The main screen is displayed, Babylog VN500 con-
patient. tinues ventilating.
Change the ventilation settings if necessary. Touch
the Ventilation settings button (B). Additional information
Babylog VN500 opens the relevant page.
If the patient category or the body weight is
Start/Standby changed, Babylog VN500 determines new start-up
values for ventilation. See "Admission of a new pa-
C tient" on page 59.
For information on changing ventilation settings,
see "Setting ventilation" on page 74.
B
091
Ending operation
1 Switch Babylog VN500 to standby mode: Touch Shutdown

the Start/ Standby... button in the main menu
bar. Touch the Standby button and confirm with
the rotary knob.
B C
114
3 Touch the OK (B) button and confirm with the

rotary knob.
Babylog VN500 ends operation.
To return to standby mode:
A
z Touch the Cancel (C) button.
017
2 Press the (A) button on Infinity C500. When Babylog VN500 is not in standby mode and
the (A) button is pressed, the Start/Standby
Babylog VN500 opens the Shutdown dialog. page is opened.
Operation
As soon as the screen is completely dark If Babylog VN500 cannot be switched off on
account of a device malfunction
z Disconnect the mains plug from the mains pow-
er socket. 1 Open the device flap on the left side of
Babylog VN500.
z Detach the gas supply connectors for com-
pressed air (Air) and oxygen (O2) from the wall 2 Set the toggle switch to (off).
outlets of the central gas supply.
Once the toggle switch has been pressed and the
mains plug is disconnected, Babylog VN500 can-
CAUTION
not be switched on.
Disconnect the compressed gas hoses from the
central gas supply. Otherwise minute internal
leaks could contaminate the central gas supply Placing back into operation
through the reverse flow of supply gases. 1 Insert the mains plug into the mains power
socket.
CAUTION
2 Open the device flap on the left side of
The compressed gas hoses should only be un-
Babylog VN500.
screwed from the ventilation unit after the connec-
tors have been removed from the wall outlets of 3 Set the toggle switch to (on).
the central gas supply. Otherwise the compressed
4 Switch on Babylog VN500.
gas hoses are not depressurized and the user
may be injured.
If the power supply unit PS500 is connected, see
"Power supply unit PS500" on page 51.
Storing Babylog VN500
Switch Babylog VN500 to energy-saving mode if

stored for longer periods.
1 End operation. See "Ending operation"
on page 103.
2 Set the toggle switch on the left side of
Babylog VN500 to (off) immediately after
switching off the device.
3 If the power supply unit PS500 is connected,
also set the toggle switch at the rear of PS500
to (off).
4 Disconnect the mains plug from the mains pow-
er socket.
Operation
Mains power supply / DC power supply
Components and terms Display of power supplies

Mains power supply The power supply is displayed on the operating and
display unit Infinity C500.
The device is supplied electrically via the mains
connection cable from the mains power supply. In-
formation on voltage ranges and mains power char-
acteristic values can be found in chapter Technical
Data, Operating Characteristic Values.
Internal Battery
Babylog VN500 is provided with an internal battery
to ensure that operation of the device can continue A B
for at least 30 minutes (provided that the battery is
fully charged and new) following failure of the
017
mains power supply.
The internal battery is always contained in the A LED for mains power:
scope of supply. Typically, the internal battery is – Lights green when mains power is applied
only fully charged after charging for 4 hours. The and the toggle switch is in the position
is displayed in the screen header bar. – If the LED does not light up, the device is
disconnected from the mains power
CAUTION B LED for internal battery:
The internal battery is intended exclusively for – Lights green when the state of charge is
emergency use and not for normal operation! It is greater than 90 %
essential to operate the device with mains power – Lights yellow when the state of charge is be-
again as soon as possible after switching over to tween 10 % and 90 %
operation with the internal battery. – Does not light when the internal battery is
discharged or faulty
– Does not light when no mains power is ap-
Use of power supplies
plied and the device is switched off (energy-
The supply of Babylog VN500 with electrical power saving mode)
is prioritized based on the following sources:
– Mains power Operating time of internal battery
– Internal Battery The operating time depends on the following fac-
tors:
The switch-over between these sources takes
– State of charge
place without interruption to operation according to
– Age
the following rules:
– Number of charging cycles
– If there is sufficient mains power, the mains
If the battery is fully charged and new, the operating
power supply is always used as the power
time is at least 30 minutes.
source.
Observe the maintenance intervals.
– If mains power supply is not sufficient, the inter-
nal battery is used.
Operation
Charging the internal battery z Connect to the mains power supply at the latest
after 5 days Babylog VN500. Leave the device
The internal battery is charged when
connected to the mains power supply for at
Babylog VN500 is supplied with mains power.
least 4 hours so that the internal battery can be
fully charged.
CAUTION
Leave Babylog VN500 connected to the mains z If recharging is not possible at the latest after
power supply for at least 4 hours so that the inter- 5 days, disconnect the electrical connection be-
nal battery can be fully charged. tween the internal battery and the device imme-
diately after ending operation. To do this, set the
Charging display on screen toggle switch to the position and then dis-
connect the mains plug. Babylog VN500 is in
The state of charge of the internal battery is dis-
energy-saving mode. This reduces the sponta-
played in the screen header bar (A).
neous discharge rate of batteries. Check that
the capacity of the internal battery is sufficient
A before use on the patient. The internal battery
1 2 3
can be deep discharged or destroyed by too

long storage.
078
Batteries are wear parts. The internal battery must

Symbol State of charge be exchanged depending on the degree of wear.
90 to 100 % Observe the maintenance intervals.
60 to <90 % Storage at an increased ambient temperature re-

duces the service life of the internal battery. The fol-
40 to <60 %
lowing times should not be exceeded:
20 to <40 % – Temperature –20 °C to +45 °C
<20 %, flashes in 1-second pulses (–4 °F to +113 °F): up to 6 months
light and dark red – Temperature +45 °C to +65 °C
(+113 °F to +149 °F): up to 1 week
Internal battery defective or no infor-
mation on the battery state of charge The capacity of the internal batteries used must be
available checked regularly. The battery must always have
sufficient capacity. Exchange the internal battery if
When the internal battery is charged, the last seg- necessary.
ment in the battery symbol flashes white.
Charging time Mains power operation
The charging time increases significantly when the When supplied with mains power, Babylog VN500
battery is warm, e.g., from high ambient tempera- switches to mains voltage operation. The internal
tures or after a deep discharge. battery is also charged at the same time. The last
segment in the battery symbol flashes white to pro-
vide information on the charging process.
Battery maintenance
To ensure a maximum service life, the following is
recommended:
z Always fully charge the internal battery.
Operation
Internal battery operation About 2 minutes before expiration of the operating

time the device generates the alarm message
In the event that the mains power supply fails,
Internal battery low.
Babylog VN500 switches over (without interrup-
tion) to the internal battery. The state of charge of After expiration of the operating time, the device
the internal battery is reduced when the device generates the alarm message Internal battery dis-
switches over to the internal battery. The LED charged. Reestablish the supply of mains power
on Infinity C500 lights yellow as soon as the state of immediately to avoid an interruption of the ventila-
charge is less than 90 %. tion functions.
The switch-over to the internal battery is indicated Recharge the battery after power supply with the in-
with the alarm message Internal battery activat- ternal battery. Reestablish the supply of mains pow-
ed. The alarm priority can be configured, see "Set- er immediately.
ting the priority of the battery alarm" on page 151.
The Workstation Neonatal Care can be equipped scope of delivery. Typically, the internal batteries
with an uninterruptible power supply via the power are only fully charged after charging for 8 hours.
supply unit PS500, which ensures operation of the PS500 displays the symbol on the front.
Workstation Neonatal Care for at least 100 minutes
in the event of a power supply failure and during the
Use of power supplies
transportation of patients within the hospital (pro-
vided the batteries are fully charged and new and The supply of the Workstation Neonatal Care with
ventilation is typical). electrical power is prioritized based on the following
sources:
Components and terms – Mains power
Mains power supply – Internal batteries PS500
Power supply of PS500 is via the mains connection The switch-over between these sources takes
cable from the mains power supply. Information on place without interruption to operation according to
voltage ranges and mains power characteristic val- the following rules:
ues can be found in chapter Technical Data, Oper-
– If there is sufficient mains power, the mains
ating Characteristic Values.
power supply is always used as the power
Internal batteries PS500 source.
PS500 is provided with internal batteries to ensure – If mains power supply is not sufficient, the inter-
operation of the Workstation Neonatal Care for at nal batteries are used.
least 100 minutes in the event of a power failure
(provided that the batteries are fully charged and
new). Battery operation is possible for longer in the
absence of the gas supply unit GS500.
The internal batteries are always contained in the
Operation
Display of power supplies Charge indication on PS500

Power supply is indicated on the front of PS500. The state of charge of the internal batteries is indi-
cated on the front of PS500.
Symbol State of charge

C
90 to 100 %
A
B 60 to <90 %
40 to <60 %
20 to <40 %
<20 %, flashes red in 1-second inter-
vals
334
A LED for mains power: Internal batteries defective or no in-

– Lights green when mains power is applied formation on the battery charge state
– If the LED does not light up, the device is available, or toggle switch is in the
disconnected from the mains power (off) position
B LEDs indicate the state of charge of the
internal batteries. See "Charge indication on Mains power operation
PS500" on page 108.
When supplied with mains power, PS500 switches
C LED indicates a fault. to mains voltage operation. The internal batteries
are charged at the same time. The last LED in the
charge indicator of PS500 flashes to indicate the
Operating time of internal batteries
charging process.
The operating time depends on the following fac-
tors:
Operation with internal batteries
– State of charge
– Age If the mains power supply fails, PS500 switches
– Number of charging cycles over (without interruption) to the internal batteries.
The state of charge of the internal batteries is re-
If the batteries are fully charged and new, and ven-
duced when the device switches over to the internal
tilation is typical, the operating time is at least
batteries. The LED for mains power (A) on
100 minutes.
PS500 no longer lights up.
Observe the maintenance intervals.
When the state of charge of the internal batteries is
below 20 %, the charge indicator on PS500 flashes
Charging internal batteries red.
The internal batteries are recharged when PS500 is Reestablish the mains power supply immediately to
supplied with mains power and is not switched off avoid an interruption of the ventilation functions.
via the toggle switch on PS500.
Recharge the battery after power supply with the in-
CAUTION ternal batteries of PS500. Reestablish the mains
power supply immediately.
Leave PS500 connected to the mains power sup-
ply for at least 8 hours so that the internal batter-
ies can be fully charged.
Operation
Standby mode of PS500 z If recharging is not possible at the latest after

30 days, set the toggle switch on PS500 to the
In order to reduce discharging of the batteries and
(off) position immediately after the end of
to extend operational readiness, PS500 can be
operation.
switched to standby mode during operation without
PS500 is switched off. This reduces the sponta-
mains power supply. When PS500 is in standby
neous discharge rate of batteries. Check that
mode, the Workstation Neonatal Care is not pow-
the capacity of the internal batteries is sufficient
ered by the internal batteries of PS500.
before use on the patient. The internal batteries
Activating standby mode: can be deep discharged or destroyed by exces-
sively long storage.
Batteries are wear parts. The internal batteries
must be exchanged depending on the degree of
A wear. Observe the maintenance intervals.
Storage at an increased ambient temperature re-
duces the service life of the internal batteries.
The capacity of the internal batteries used must be
checked regularly. The batteries must always have
sufficient capacity. Exchange the internal batteries
336
if necessary.
z Press the button (A) on PS500 and hold it for
at least 3 seconds.
PS500 interrupts power supply of the Workstation Fault – Cause – Remedy on PS500
Neonatal Care. The charge indicator on PS500 ex-
tinguishes. Fault Cause Remedy
Resuming operation: Charge indica- Charge state of Restore power
tor flashes red the batteries supply.
z Press the button (A) on PS500.
<20 % or dis-
The Workstation Neonatal Care is supplied with charged
power from the internal batteries of PS500. The No charge indi- Battery fault Contact
state of charge of the internal batteries is indicated. cation and fault DrägerService.
When the mains power supply is reestablished, indicator flash-
standby mode is terminated automatically. The es yellow
Workstation Neonatal Care is automatically sup- Charge indica- Device temper- Contact
plied with mains power again. tor flashes yel- ature too high DrägerService.
low or overload
Battery maintenance
To ensure a maximum service life, the following is
recommended:
z Always fully charge the internal batteries.
z Connect PS500 to the mains power supply after
a maximum of 30 days. Leave PS500 connect-
ed to the mains power supply for at least
8 hours in order to charge the internal batteries.
Alarms
Alarms
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Display of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Displaying information on alarms. . . . . . . . . 113

Displaying current alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Displaying the cause and remedy for an
alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Acknowledging an alarm message that is no
longer active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Acknowledging all alarm messages that are
no longer active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting the alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

How to set an alarm limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Deactivating alarm limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Response to power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Display of alarm limits in the parameter field . . 115
Setting the volume of the alarm tone . . . . . . 116
Suppressing the alarm tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Position of the user to the alarm system . . . 117
Failure of the acoustic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Alarms
Overview
Alarms are issued acoustically and visually. The The Alarms dialog window provides the following
alarm tone can be suppressed for 2 minutes. functions for selection:
– Setting alarm limits
– Displaying current alarms
– Alarm history
– Alarm settings
Display of alarms
In the event of an alarm, the system displays the Alarm priorities

relevant alarm message in the alarm message field
(A). If the parameter field (B) is configured to dis- Babylog VN500 assigns the appropriate priority to
play an individual parameter, the parameter field each alarm message.
(B) of the parameter triggering the alarm flashes.
The background color of the alarm message field
indicates the priority of active alarm messages. The
C A
1 2 3
parameter field of the parameter triggering the
alarm flashes in the color matching the alarm prior-
ity.
B Warning High priority alarm Red background

message
Caution Medium priority Yellow
alarm message background
Note Low priority alarm Cyan background
message
078
If the alarm message field (A) contains more alarms High priority alarm messages that are no longer ac-
than can be displayed, the More... (C) button ap- tive are displayed in the background color of the
pears in the header bar. Touching this button opens alarm message field.
the page containing all the active alarms.
Babylog VN500 generates different alarm tone se-
quences to display alarms acoustically. The alarm
tone sequences can be configured, see "Selecting
alarm tone sequences" on page 151.
Alarms
Displaying information on alarms
Displaying current alarms Acknowledging an alarm message that

is no longer active
To display the current alarms, proceed as follows:
1 Touch the alarm message in the header bar. After the fault has been eliminated, the alarm tone
is silenced. Medium and low priority alarm messag-
Or es expire automatically. High priority alarm mes-
1 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu sages continue to be displayed even after the
bar. cause of the alarm has been eliminated and need
to be acknowledged.
2 Touch the Current alarms (A) tab.
A
Alarms C 1 2 3
078
z Touch the ALARM RESET (A) button in the
header bar.
B
Acknowledging all alarm messages that

are no longer active
082
All the current alarm messages are displayed chro-

nologically with the corresponding duration, priority Prerequisite: The Current alarms (A) page is
and alarm message text in the (B) list. opened.
Alarms
Displaying the cause and remedy for an A

alarm B
1 Touch the alarm message or select it in the (B)

list with the rotary knob.
2 Touch the (C) button.
This displays the cause and remedy for the alarm
082
message selected.
1 Touch the Reset all (B) button.
3 Eliminate the fault.
Additional information The acknowledgeable messages are deleted in the

header bar and in the list containing the current
For a list of causes and remedies, see chapter alarms. However, Babylog VN500 records all alarm
"Alarm – Cause – Remedy" on page 165. messages in the alarm history.
Alarms
Alarm history
The alarm history records all alarm messages in Alarms

chronological order.
A
The entries in the alarm history are also retained af-
ter the device has been switched off and on again
or following a power supply failure. B
1 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu
bar.
B
2 Touch the Alarm history (A) tab.
094
3 Use the (B) buttons to scroll in the alarm history.
Setting the alarm limits
z Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu How to set an alarm limit
bar.
The Limits (A) page appears by default. Prerequisite: The Limits (A) page is opened.
1 Touch the corresponding button for the alarm
Alarms
limit.
A
push to confirm.
B
C WARNING
D The alarm limits must be set to meet the needs
of the therapy required by the current patient.
Other settings may jeopardize the patient.
096
The alarm limit settings and the current measured Additional information
value are displayed. The start-up values for the alarm limits can be con-
figured specifically as required by the hospital con-
(B) : Upper alarm limit cerned, see page 149.
(C) Current value : Current measured value Setting extreme alarm limits can render the alarm
(D) : Lower alarm limit system useless.
The alarm limits are displayed depending on the
ventilation parameter in the parameter field.
Alarms
Deactivating alarm limits Display of alarm limits in the parameter

field
WARNING
If the alarm limits are assigned to a ventilation pa-
Alarms should only be deactivated if the safe-
rameter, the alarm limits are displayed in the pa-
ty of the patient is not jeopardized by the ab-
rameter fields for single parameters (standard and
sence of an alarm!
double size).
The following alarm limits can be deactivated: The following assignments have been defined:
– RR
– Tapn Alarm limits Measured values
– MV low (in NIV application mode)
MV high, MV low MV
Paw high PIP
How to deactivate an alarm limit
RR high RR
1 Touch the corresponding button for the alarm
Tdisconnect PEEP
limit.
(in NIV mode)
2 Continue turning the rotary knob until Off is dis-
played instead of the value.
The alarm limit is deactivated. Babylog VN500 dis-
plays the symbol in the header bar and the de-
activated alarm limit. The header bar can display up
to 5 deactivated alarm limits.
Response to power failure
Alarm limits are also retained in the event of a pow-

er failure, e. g., caused by a defective internal bat-
tery.
Alarms
Setting the volume of the alarm tone
1 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu 3 Touch the (B) button.
bar.
4 Set the volume of the alarm tone by turning the
2 Touch the Settings (A) tab. rotary knob and push to confirm.
Alarms WARNING
A The volume of the acoustic alarm must be set
B loud enough to ensure that an alarm can be
heard!
During the automatic switch-over between day and

night modes, the alarm tone volume setting is over-
written by the volumes defined for these times. An
automatic increase in volume can be activated. See
095
"Setting the alarm tone" on page 151.
Suppressing the alarm tone
The alarm tone can be suppressed for a maximum If the fault triggering the alarm is not eliminated af-
of 2 minutes. ter 2 minutes, the alarm tone sounds again.
Reactivate the alarm tone before the suppression
time has elapsed:
z Press the Audio paused (A) key again.
A
017
z Press the Audio paused (A) key.

This suppresses the acoustic alarm for 2 minutes.
Babylog VN500 displays the symbol in the
header bar and the remaining time for the sup-
pressed alarm tone.
Alarms
Position of the user to the alarm system
The alarm system is designed such that the user specified applies to a distance of 1 meter
can recognize alarm messages from a distance of (39 inches) in front of the device and a height of
1 meter (39 inches). The volume of the alarm tone 1.5 m (59 inches).
Failure of the acoustic alarm
If the loudspeaker for acoustic alarm signaling

(main alarm) fails on account of a defect, an inter-
mittent tone will be generated by the loudspeaker
for the auxiliary alarm.
This intermittent tone is also used for the power fail-
ure alarm.
Additional information on the power failure

alarm
See "Failure of the electrical power supply"
on page 52.
Trends and Data
Trends and Data
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Displaying trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Graphic trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Apnea trend, apnea ventilation trend . . . . . . . . 122
Tabular trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Display data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Displaying hospital-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Displaying all measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Displaying setting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Display logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Data export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Trends and Data
Overview
Babylog VN500 saves measured value and trend The Trends/Data dialog window provides the fol-
data. Trends are displayed in the form of a graphic lowing functions for selection:
or a table. The following can be displayed: current – Display trends
measured values, settings and hospital-specific – Display data
combinations of measured and setting values. The – Logbook
logbook can save up to a maximum of 5000 entries. – Data export
Data can be exported with a USB storage media.
Displaying trends
Trends are displayed as a graphic or a table. Displaying an additional graphic trend

Trends are recorded for up to 7 days.
Prerequisite: The Trends (A) page is opened.
In graphic trends, measured values are displayed
z Touch the Graphics 2 (C) tab.
in blue and setting values in green. In the apnea
trend, the number of the apneic events that oc- Each page contains 2 graphic trend displays (D).
curred per minute is represented as a histogram.
In tabular trends, measured values are displayed in
blue writing and setting values in green writing.
Graphic trends
1 Touch the Trends/Data... button in the main

menu bar.
Babylog VN500 opens the Trends (A) page with
the Graphics 1 (B) page.
Trends/Data
A
E B
D C
D E
076
Trends and Data
Selecting parameters for the graphic trend 4 Confirm with the OK button. The dialog for the
display group selected is closed.
A maximum of 3 parameters can be selected for A maximum of 3 parameters can be selected for
each trend display. each graphic trend display.
Prerequisite: The Graphics 1 or Graphics 2 page 5 Select further parameters according to step 2
is opened. to 4.
1 Touch the button (E). 6 Confirm the parameter selection with the OK
button (H).
The Setup dialog is displayed with the buttons for
measured values Values (F) and setting values The selected parameters are displayed in the trend
Settings (G). display. The Setup dialog is closed.
Setup The selection can be aborted with Cancel (I). The

F G previous selection is displayed in the graphic trend.
Clear (J) can be used to delete all parameter selec-
tions made.
Deselecting a parameter in the trend display

Touch the parameter to be deselected in the param-
eter type dialog. The button turns pale green.
J I H Selecting a time interval for the graphic trend

138
display
The measured values (F) are divided into the fol-
Prerequisite: The Graphics 1 or Graphics 2 page
lowing parameter types:
is opened.
– Pressures
– Minute vol. Trends/Data
– Volume/Flow
– Gases
– Timing/Cycl. L
– Others M
– Events
The setting values (G) are divided into the following
parameter types:
– Pressures
– Volume/Flow N
– Gases K
076
– Timing/Cycl.
– Others 1 Touch the button for the time interval (K).
2 Touch the appropriate button for measured val- 2 Select the time interval from the selection list
ue or setting value. (2, 4, 8, 12 hours; 1 day, 7 days).
Another dialog containing all the parameters of the
selected parameter type is displayed.
3 Touch the desired parameter.
Trends and Data
Displaying the value of a parameter at a certain Trends/Data

moment in time
z Position the cursor (L) on the time by turning the
rotary knob or touching the time.
A
The parameter value and the marked time are dis-
played (M).
B
The marked time in the trend display also corre-
sponds with the marked row of this time in the log-
book.
315
Changing the displayed time period
A Apnea trend
z Touch the buttons in the scrollbar (N) or turn the
rotary knob. B Apnea ventilation trend
Apnea trend, apnea ventilation trend
The apnea trend is only recorded when apnea ven-
tilation is switched off.
In the apnea trend, the number of the apneic events
that occurred per minute is represented as a histo- The duration of an apnea is displayed only in the
gram. The number per minute is represented as a alarm history.
bar height. If an apnea lasts longer than one
minute, the apnea is only counted once in the peri-
od of occurrence.
In the apnea ventilation trend, the system displays
whether or not apnea ventilation is activated.
Prerequisite: The Graphics 1 or Graphics 2 page
is opened.
1 Touch the button.
2 In the Setup dialog under Values, touch the
Events parameter type.
3 Select the Apnea or Apnea Vent.. event.
Trends and Data
Tabular trend
Babylog VN500 displays the trends of all parame-

ters in a table. The parameters that are first dis-
played correspond with the parameters configured
specifically for the hospital. These are followed by
all measured values, and then all setting values.
menu bar.
2 Touch the Table (A) tab.
Trends/Data
B C D
G A
G
F
E
097
The trend values for the parameters (B) with the

units (C) are displayed in 7 to 8 time columns (D).
Use the buttons (G) to scroll in the trend table.
Selecting a time interval for the tabular trend

display
1 Touch the button for the time interval (E).
2 Select the time interval from the selection list
(5, 10, 30 minutes; 1, 2, 6, 12 hours; 1 day).
Displaying the value of a parameter at a certain

moment in time
z Position the cursor (F) on the time by turning the
rotary knob or touching the time.
"Configuring the display of hospital-specific mea-
sured values and settings" on page 146.
Trends and Data
Display data
The following data can be displayed: Displaying all measured values

– Hospital-specific data
– Measured values 1 Prerequisite: The Values (A) page is opened.
– Measured values 2
– Setting values z Touch the Values 1 (B) or Values 2 (C) tab.
Measured values are displayed on a blue back- Trends/Data

ground and setting values on a green background. A
B
Displaying hospital-specific data C
menu bar.
2 Touch the Values (A) tab.
Trends/Data
139
A
B
Displaying setting values
C C Prerequisite: The Values (A) page is opened.

z Touch the Settings (B) tab.
Trends/Data
A
099
Babylog VN500 opens the page containing the cur-

rent, hospital-specific measured and setting values
(B). B
Babylog VN500 displays the hospital-specific mea-
sured and setting values (C)selected in the system
setup.
140
"Configuring the display of hospital-specific mea-
sured values and settings" on page 146.
Trends and Data
Display logbook
The logbook records changes, events and alarms

in chronological order. A maximum of 5000 logbook
entries is possible. Events are, e.g., use of the med-
ication nebulizer or flow calibration. For alarms only
the occurrence of the alarm condition is recorded,
not its termination.
The entries in the logbook are also retained after
the device has been switched off and on again or
following a power supply failure.
menu bar.
2 Touch the Logbook (A) tab.
Trends/Data
A
D
B
D
C
090
Babylog VN500 opens the logbook. The cursor (B)

marks a row in the logbook. The marked row corre-
sponds with the cursor position in the trend display.
For the marked row Babylog VN500 displays all the
setting values of the ventilation mode effective at
this time in the (C) field.
Displaying the setting parameters at another

moment in time
z Select the row by turning the rotary knob or
touching the row.
With the button (D) the cursor can be moved back-
wards or forwards by least 24 hours.
Trends and Data
Data export
The data export takes place via a USB storage me- Additional information
dia. A maximum of 5000 logbook entries from the
The buttons are deactivated when a USB storage
last 7 days can be exported.
media is not connected.
1 Insert the USB media into the left or right USB
The exported files can only be viewed with a
port of Infinity C500.
Unicode-enabled editor and a Unicode font.
An import into word processors or spreadsheets is
menu bar.
possible.
3 Touch the Export data (A) tab.
Trends/Data H
A
I B
C
D
E
F
G
127
The following data can be exported:

– Current setting and measured values (B)
– Results obtained from the device check (C)
– Results obtained from the breathing circuit
check (D)
– Logbook 1 day or 7 days (E)
– Alarm history 1 day or 7 days (F)
– Trends 1 day or 7 days (G)
4 Touch the appropriate button for the export of
the related data.
5 For the export of all the data, touch the All data
button (I).
The data is exported to the USB storage media. Af-
ter the successful completion of the data export,
Babylog VN500 displays a message in the (H)
message field.
After the data export

z Remove the USB storage media from the USB
port at the earliest after 2 seconds.
Monitoring
Monitoring
Information on calibrating the sensors . . . . 128
Neonatal flow sensor calibration . . . . . . . . . 129
Calibrating the O2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Calibrating the CO2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Selecting the cuvette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Information on checking the CO2 sensor . . . . . 132
Information on the alarm messages issued
during CO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Performing a CO2 zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . 133
Checking calibration of the CO2 sensor with
test filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Checking calibration of the CO2 sensor with
test gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Perform calibration of the CO2 sensor . . . . . . . 135
Deactivating or activating monitoring . . . . . 137

Deactivating or activating neonatal flow
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Deactivating or activating O2 monitoring . . . . . 138
Deactivating or activating CO2 monitoring . . . . 139
Neonatal flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Possible displays for measured values . . . . 140

Display of etCO2 measured values . . . . . . . . . 140
Monitoring
Information on calibrating the sensors
Babylog VN500 uses the following sensors for

measurement and monitoring purposes:
– Neonatal flow sensor
– O2 sensor
– Pressure sensor
– CO2 sensor
CAUTION
Regular calibration is essential to ensure that the
sensors deliver reliable and accurate results. Oth-
erwise the proper functioning of the device may
be impaired.
The sensors are calibrated in the following inter-

vals:
Sensor Interval
Neonatal flow Calibration during the device
sensor check.
Perform manual calibration:
– At least once a day
– After replacing the neonatal
flow sensor
– After medication nebuliza-
tion
O2 sensor Calibration during the device
check.
Pressure Automatic calibration immedi-
sensors ately and an hour after the de-
vice has been switched on, af-
terwards every 12 hours.
CO2 sensor The calibration can be carried
out at any time outside of the
breathing circuit.
The calibration or zero-checking values of the sen-

sors that were last determined remain stored until
the next calibration or zero check, even if the device
is switched off.
Monitoring
Neonatal flow sensor calibration
Calibration of the neonatal flow sensor corresponds Sensors/Parameters C

to a zero calibration. A
Neonatal flow sensor calibration is performed at the B D
following intervals: G
– Calibration during the device check
– Manual calibration, at least once a day
– Manual calibration, after replacement of the F
neonatal flow sensor
E
– Manual calibration, after medication nebuliza-
308
tion
Select Sensor type (F) being used:
Recalibration is not necessary if the neonatal flow
2 Touch the Y flow sensor or
sensor has been unplugged only briefly.
ISO-15 flow sensor button.
Before each manual calibration, started from the
3 Touch the Start (B) button.
device check or from the Sensors/Parameters di-
alog window, the neonatal flow sensor is automati- The instruction field (G) displays the instructions for
cally cleaned through heating by Babylog VN500. performing calibration.
WARNING
Remove the neonatal flow sensor
Patient hazard due to ignition in the flow sen-
sor. 4 Remove the tube connector.
Residual vapors of flammable substances
(e.g., alcohols) may cause a fire during cali-
bration of the flow sensor. This can destroy H I
the flow sensor and injure the patient or user.
Air flow sensors for at least 30 minutes after
disinfection.
Start calibration of the neonatal flow sensor

307
1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the 5 Put on sterile glove.

main menu bar.
6 Seal the ISO 15 neonatal flow sensor (H) or
Babylog VN500 opens the Sensors/Parameters neonatal flow sensor Y-piece (I).
dialog window. The Neonatal flow (A) page ap-
This ensures that the requirement for calibration
pears by default.
(flow = 0) is met.
Performing calibration
7 Press the rotary knob.
Babylog VN500 calibrates the neonatal flow sen-
sor.
Monitoring
Babylog VN500 displays calibration information in After calibration of the neonatal flow sensor
the (C) message field.
8 Connect the tube connector.
At the completion of calibration, the Start button
turns pale green.
Setting the flow trigger
z Touch the Trigger (E) button.
Canceling calibration of the neonatal flow sen-
sor Babylog VN500 opens the page for setting the flow
trigger. For additional information, see "Additional
z Touch the Cancel (D) button.
settings for ventilation" on page 79.
Calibrating the O2 sensor
The O2 sensor is calibrated during the device

check. Regular calibration during the device check
ensures the specified accuracy. If the O2 sensor is
not calibrated for 3 months, the accuracy of the
O2 sensor will be reduced. The parameter field for
the O2 concentration also displays a question mark
in addition to the measured value.
FiO2 Vol%
22?
141
After calibration during the device check the sensor

will work again with full accuracy.
CAUTION
If the quality of the oxygen from the central gas
supply is not sufficient, calibrate the O2 sensor
with calibration gas (100 % O2). Otherwise this
may result in an incorrect calibration.
"Performing a device check" on page 63.
Monitoring
Calibrating the CO2 sensor
Prerequisite: The CO2 application is activated. If the selected cuvette does not correspond to the
cuvette used, the alarm message Check cuvette is
The CO2 sensor is works-calibrated and can be
displayed.
used on any ventilation unit.
The following cuvettes can be used:
– Reusable cuvettes
– Disposable cuvettes
The cuvette type used must be selected on the
Zero calib. on/off page.
Selecting the cuvette type
CAUTION
The cuvette windows of the reusable cuvette have
different optical properties to the cuvette windows
of the disposable cuvette.
The cuvette type used must therefore be selected
on the Zero calib. on/off page. Otherwise the
zero point is shifted by up to 8 mmHg CO2.
1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the

main menu bar.
2 Touch the CO2 (A) tab.
The Zero calib. on/off (B) page appears by default.
Sensors/Parameters
A
B
C D
142
3 Touch the Reusable (C) or Disposable button

(D) and confirm with the rotary knob.
Monitoring
Information on checking the CO2 sensor Information on the alarm messages

issued during CO2 monitoring
Information on checking the zero indication and
zero calibration This information refers to the alarm messages
which are generated due to a soiled cuvette or sen-
When checking the zero indication or performing sor.
zero calibration, the CO2 concentration between
the panes of the cuvette window must not be higher
than the background concentration of approx. Alarm message Clean CO2 cuvette
0.4 mmHg or 0.05 Vol% which is normally present If the Clean CO2 cuvette message is displayed,
in rooms. For this reason, do not breathe on or into the following panes may be soiled:
the cuvettes. – Cuvette (disposable or reusable cuvette)
The following checks are necessary for the – CO2 sensor
CO2 sensor: 1 Clean the cuvette or use another cuvette.
– When using reusable cuvettes, insert a
Check Interval clean reusable cuvette.
CO2 zero Required before measurement – When using disposable cuvettes, insert
indication in and when changing the a new disposable cuvette.
ambient air CO2 sensor to another ventila- 2 Clean the CO2 sensor.
tion unit.
If 0.2 to 0.6 mmHg is not dis- Alarm message CO2 zero calibration?
played in the ambient air, per-
form a zero calibration. If the CO2 zero calibration? alarm message is dis-
played or if incorrect measured values are suspect-
Check the Required in intervals of one
ed, e.g., etCO2 values too low or inspiratory values
calibration of the month.
too high, then proceed as follows:
CO2 sensor with
test filter 1 Check whether the cuvette windows are soiled.
Check the When the test values are not 2 Clean the soiled windows. Or, if a reusable cu-
calibration of the adhered to during the calibra- vette was used previously, use a clean reusable
CO2 sensor with tion check with test filter. cuvette. If a disposable cuvette was used previ-
test gas ously, use a new disposable cuvette.
Calibration of the When the test values are not If the cuvette windows are extremely soiled, e.g.,
CO2 sensor adhered to during the calibra- deposits due to medication nebulization, this may
tion check with test gas or test result in a zero shift. The CO2 measured values
filter. may be incorrect even before insufficient
measuring light causes the Clean CO2 cuvette
The following can be carried out during ventilation: message to appear.
zero calibration in ambient air, calibration check
with test filter or test gas and calibration of the If the CO2 zero calibration? message does not
CO2 sensor. subsequently disappear or if the measured values
remain suspect, a zero calibration must be per-
formed.
Monitoring
Performing a CO2 zero calibration When requested by Babylog VN500:
Zero calibration is performed with a clean CO2 sen-

sor which is removed from the cuvette. Zero cali- D
bration is performed in ambient air.
CAUTION
The cuvette windows of the reusable cuvette have
different optical properties to the cuvette windows
of the disposable cuvette. E
179
The cuvette type used must therefore be selected
on the Zero calib. on/off page. Otherwise the 4 Remove CO2 sensor (D) from the cuvette (E).
zero point is shifted by up to 8 mmHg CO2. 5 Confirm with the rotary knob.
Prerequisite: Babylog VN500 is switched on and at Babylog VN500 performs zero calibration and dis-
least the three-minute warm-up phase for the plays the message Calibration in progress.
CO2 sensor has elapsed. After 3 minutes, the mea-
sured values will be inside the specified tolerance If zero calibration was successful
range.
After approx. 5 seconds, Babylog VN500 reports
Zero calibration successful.
Starting zero calibration
z Fit the CO2 sensor (D) back on the cuvette (E).
main menu bar.
If zero calibration was not successful
2 Touch the CO2 (A) tab.
Babylog VN500 reports Zero calibration can-
The Zero calib. on/off (B) page appears by default. celed.
Sensors/Parameters z Repeat zero calibration.
A
B If zero calibration is still impossible
C
1 Check whether the sensor is soiled and clean it
if necessary. If the sensor is defective, replace
the sensor.
2 Repeat zero calibration.
142
3 Touch the Start (C) button.
Monitoring
Checking calibration of the CO2 sensor If the check was successful

with test filter Babylog VN500 displays the message Filter check
successful. The test value is within the permissible
Perform the calibration check of the CO2 sensor tolerance.
with test filter in intervals of one month.
z Fit the CO2 sensor back on the cuvette.
Before the check

If the check was not successful
Prerequisite: Babylog VN500 is switched on and at
least the three-minute warm-up phase for the Babylog VN500 displays the message Filter check
CO2 sensor has elapsed. failed. The test value is outside the permissible tol-
erance.
z Perform CO2 zero calibration in ambient air.
z Check CO2 calibration with test gas or perform
calibration of the CO2 sensor.
Starting the calibration check of the CO2 sensor
with test filter
Prerequisite: The CO2 (A) page is opened. Checking calibration of the CO2 sensor
with test gas
1 Touch the Check sensor (B) tab.
Sensors/Parameters D Carry out the check when the test values are not
adhered to during the calibration check of the
A
CO2 sensor with test filter.
C B The calibration check with test gas can only be car-
ried out after zero calibration has been performed in
ambient air.
CAUTION
For the check and calibration only use a test gas
143
which consists of CO2 and N2! Otherwise display

2 Remove the sensor from the cuvette and con- deviations of ±0.5 Vol% CO2 may occur.
nect it to the test filter (E) on the sensor cable.
Before the check

Prerequisite: Babylog VN500 is switched on and at
least the three-minute warm-up phase for the
CO2 sensor has elapsed.
z Perform CO2 zero calibration in ambient air.
E
177
Connecting the test gas supply

3 Touch the Filter check (C) button. The test gas must only consist of CO2 and N2!
Babylog VN500 starts the CO2 sensor check and 1 Use the reusable cuvette from the calibration
displays the course and result of the filter check in set!
the message field (D).
2 On the Zero calib. on/off page, select the cu-
vette type Reusable.
Monitoring
About 1 minute after the test gas flow has been set,
the value of CO2 must match to within ±0.2 Vol%
the CO2 content of the test gas read from the test
gas cylinder.
D
3 Close the test gas cylinder again.
E If the test value is outside the permitted tolerance,
C the CO2 sensor must be recalibrated with test gas.
B
After the calibration check of the CO2 sensor
A with test gas
z Check and if necessary select the cuvette type
176
to be used for measurement on the Zero calib.
3 Connect the test gas cylinder (A) and the cu- on/off page.
vette (B) of the calibration set to the hose (C).
z Fit the CO2 sensor back on the cuvette.
4 Fit the CO2 sensor (D) on the cuvette (F) of the
calibration set.
5 Read the CO2 concentration of the test gas Perform calibration of the CO2 sensor
from the test gas cylinder (A).
The CO2 sensor must be calibrated if the test val-
6 Open the test gas cylinder (E) and set the test
ues are not adhered to during the calibration check
gas flow to 0.1 L/min.
with test gas.
Starting the calibration check of the CO2 sensor CAUTION

with test gas For the check and calibration only use a test gas
which consists of CO2 and N2! Otherwise display
Prerequisite: The CO2 (F) page is opened.
deviations of ±0.5 Vol% CO2 may occur.
1 Touch the Check sensor (G) tab.
Sensors/Parameters Before calibration

F Prerequisite: Babylog VN500 is switched on and at
least the three-minute warm-up phase for the
G CO2 sensor has elapsed.
H I z Perform CO2 zero calibration in ambient air.
Connecting the test gas supply

The test gas must only consist of CO2 and N2!
143
2 Touch the Gas check (H) button and confirm 1 Use the reusable cuvette from the calibration
with the rotary knob. set!
Babylog VN500 displays the measured CO2 con- 2 On the Zero calib. on/off page, select the cu-
centration (I). vette type Reusable.
Monitoring
Babylog VN500 starts the calibration of the

CO2 sensor and displays the course and result of
the calibration in the message field (J).
D 4 Close the test gas cylinder again.
E If calibration was successful

C
Babylog VN500 displays the message CO2 sensor
calib. with test gas successful.
B
z Check and if necessary select the cuvette type
A to be used for measurement on the Zero calib.
on/off page.
176
3 Connect the test gas cylinder (A) and the cu- z Fit the CO2 sensor back on the cuvette.
vette (B) of the calibration set to the hose (C).
4 Fit the CO2 sensor (D) on the cuvette (B) of the If calibration was not successful
calibration set. Babylog VN500 displays the message Calibration
5 Read the CO2 concentration of the test gas of CO2 sensor with test gas failed.
from the test gas cylinder (A). If calibration failed, the following causes are possi-
6 Open the test gas cylinder (E) and set the test ble:
gas flow to 0.1 L/min.
Cause Remedy
The entered Check the entered
Starting the calibration of the CO2 sensor with
CO2 concentration CO2 concentration.
test gas
does not match the
Prerequisite: The CO2 (F) page is opened. value on the test gas
cylinder.
1 Touch the Calibration (G) tab.
The test gas cylinder Use a new test gas
Sensors/Parameters J is empty. cylinder.
F The CO2 sensor is Clean the CO2 sensor.
soiled.
I
The CO2 sensor is Exchange the CO2
H G defective. sensor.
z Repeat the calibration of the CO2 sensor.

K
144
Resetting the calibration of the CO2 sensor

2 Touch the therapy control CO2 (H). Enter the
value for the CO2 test gas concentration with If problems occurred during calibration, the sensor
the rotary knob and confirm. can be reset to the delivery default values.
3 About 1 minute after setting the test gas flow, Prerequisite: The Calibration page is opened.
touch the Start (I) button and confirm with the z Touch the Reset calibration (K) button.
rotary knob.
Monitoring
The factory-set calibration value is effective again If the calibration was unsuccessful, the previously
after approx. 5 seconds. valid calibration remains effective.
z Recover the correct calibration of the CO2 sen-
sor as soon as possible!
Deactivating or activating monitoring
Monitoring is activated at the factory. Each monitor- Without the neonatal flow sensor, the minute vol-
ing function can be deactivated separately. ume is not monitored! Independent apnea monitor-
ing is recommended.
Deactivating or activating neonatal flow Deactivating neonatal flow monitoring

monitoring
main menu bar.
WARNING
If flow and volume monitoring is deactivated, 2 Touch the Neonatal flow (A) tab if the page is
ensure that an appropriate replacement moni- not already preset.
toring function is available immediately. Other Sensors/Parameters C
settings may jeopardize the patient.
A
WARNING
No apnea monitoring takes place when flow
monitoring is deactivated. Use an indepen-
dent apnea monitoring.
D B
CAUTION
308
Patient-triggered ventilation is not possible when 3 Touch the Off (B) button and confirm with the ro-
flow monitoring is deactivated. tary knob.
Neonatal flow monitoring can be deactivated, e.g.: Babylog VN500 displays the following information
– If the neonatal flow sensor has failed but cannot in the (C) message field: External monitoring
be replaced immediately must be used!
– If medication nebulization is being performed Neonatal flow monitoring is deactivated.
– To permit ventilation in the event of major tube Babylog VN500 displays the Neonatal flow
leakage symbol in the header bar. The measured values are
When changing to the NIV application mode, no longer displayed. The alarm function is deacti-
Babylog VN500 deactivates neonatal flow monitor- vated.
ing.
Patient-triggered ventilation is not possible when
neonatal flow monitoring is deactivated. The venti-
lation functions and ventilation monitoring are limit-
ed without neonatal flow monitoring.
Monitoring
Activating neonatal flow monitoring Babylog VN500 displays the following information
in the (C) message field: External monitoring
Reactivate neonatal flow monitoring after exchang-
must be used!
ing the neonatal flow sensor or as soon as possible.
O2 monitoring is deactivated. Babylog VN500 dis-
Prerequisite: The Neonatal flow (A) page is
plays the FiO2 symbol in the header bar. The
opened.
measured values are no longer displayed. The cor-
z Touch the On (D) button and confirm with the responding alarm function is deactivated.
rotary knob.
Neonatal flow monitoring is activated. Activating O2 monitoring
O2 monitoring should be reactivated as soon as
possible.
Deactivating or activating O2 monitoring
Prerequisite: The FiO2 (A) page is opened.
WARNING z Touch the On (D) button and confirm with the
If O2 monitoring is deactivated, ensure that an rotary knob.
appropriate replacement monitoring function O2 monitoring is activated.
is available immediately. Other settings may
jeopardize the patient.
O2 monitoring can be replaced by an appropriate

replacement monitoring. Set the O2 alarm limits of
the replacement monitoring according to the set
value FiO2:
FiO2 <60 Vol% –> O2 ±4 Vol%

FiO2 ≥60 Vol% –> O2 ±6 Vol%
Deactivating O2 monitoring
main menu bar.
2 Touch the FiO2 (A) tab.
Sensors/Parameters C
A
D B
111
3 Touch the Off (B) button and confirm with the ro-
tary knob.
Monitoring
Deactivating or activating 4 Touch the Off (C) button and confirm with the
CO2 monitoring rotary knob.
CO2 monitoring is deactivated. Babylog VN500 dis-
Deactivate CO2 monitoring when a defective plays the symbol in the CO2 parameter field.
CO2 sensor cannot immediately be exchanged or The measured values are no longer displayed. The
the CO2 measured values are currently not need- alarm function is deactivated.
ed.
Activating CO2 monitoring

Deactivating CO2 monitoring
Prerequisite: The Zero calib. on/off (B) page is
1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the opened.
main menu bar.
z Touch the On (D) button and confirm with the
2 Touch the CO2 (A) tab. rotary knob.
3 Touch the Zero calib. on/off (B) tab if the page CO2 monitoring is activated.
is not already preset.
Sensors/Parameters
A
B
D C
142
Neonatal flow monitoring
The measured values for MV and VTe are not leak- z Adjust both alarm limits for MV in line with the
age-corrected and are therefore lower than the ac- actual value.
tual minute and tidal volumes applied to the patient
z Use additional monitoring, e.g., SpO2, if neces-
if a leakage occurs. When leakage compensation is
sary.
activated, the measured volume and flow values as
well as the curves for flow and volume are dis- CAUTION
played with leakage correction.
Patient hazard!
Babylog VN500 compensates leakages up to Use additional external monitoring during ventila-
100 % of the set tidal volume VT. Pressure-con- tion with very low tidal volumes.
trolled ventilation is recommended in the case of
larger leakages.
In order to avoid nuisance alarms and assure prop-
er monitoring, the following settings are required:
Monitoring
Possible displays for measured values
Instead of a measured value, the following displays

are possible in the parameter boxes or tables:
Display Cause
OFF Monitoring deactivated by user
ERR Sensor error
CAL Calibration active, no measured
value display possible
Measured Reduced sensor accuracy
value?
No measured Sensor error. Replace and cali-
value brate flow sensor or CO2 sensor
if necessary
+++ Measured value above specified
measurement range
--- Measured value below specified
measurement range
Display of etCO2 measured values
The measured value for etCO2 can be displayed in

Vol% and additionally in kPa or mmHg.
Display in kPa or mmHg is configurable, see "Con-
figuring units" on page 163.
Configuration
Configuration
Information on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configuring the screen display. . . . . . . . . . . 142

Adjusting lighting and brightness . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Configuring the screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configuring the display of hospital-specific
measured values and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Assigning functions to additional buttons . . . . . 146
Selecting parameters for the graphic trend
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Locking of therapy controls in therapy bar . . . . 148
Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Setting start-up values for alarm limits . . . . . . . 149
Setting the alarm tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuring ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . 151

Configuring start-up settings for the patient
category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Configuring start-up settings for the
ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Configuring start-up settings for the
ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Configuring general settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Setting a maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Importing and exporting configurations . . . 159
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Exchange intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Selecting country-specific settings . . . . . . . . . . 162
Configuring units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Configure interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Device extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Service dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuration
Information on configuration
The System setup dialog window provides the To prevent unauthorized adjustments, the following
user with the following configuration options: pages are password-protected:
– Screen layout – Screen layout > Views
– Alarms – Alarms
– Ventilation – Ventilation
– Config. exchange (Importing and exporting con- – Applications
figurations) – Exchange intervals
– Applications
The password only needs to be entered once as
– Exchange intervals
long as the System setup dialog window remains
– System
open.
– Service
For additional information on the password,
see page 281.
Configuring the screen display
The following settings can be configured on the

Screen layout page:
– General settings (General settings)
– Views
– Customized data (Customized data)
– Config. buttons (Configurable buttons)
– Trends graphic 1
– Trends graphic 2
– Therapy bar
The customized settings for Trends graphic 1 and
Trends graphic 2 become effective with the admis-
sion of a new patient. The other customized screen
display settings are immediately effective.
z Touch the System setup... button.
Babylog VN500 opens the System setup dialog
window. The Screen layout page appears by
default.
Configuration
Adjusting lighting and brightness The Day/Night button in the main menu bar can be
configured to enable direct access to the reduced
Prerequisite: The Screen layout (A) page is lighting mode with a dark background color,
opened. see page 146.
1 Touch the General settings (B) tab.

Adjusting screen brightness
System setup
The brightness of the screen can be set.
A
1 Touch the button for brightness (I).
C D
E F B 2 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
: G : H
push to confirm.
I
132
Automatic changeover of day and night mode

If the automatic changeover of day and night mode
is switched on, the system will automatically
change over the following settings:
– Lighting of the screen
– Volume of the alarm tone
– Activating automatic increase of the alarm tone
volume
z Touch the On (C) or Off (D) button.
Selecting the time period for screen lighting at

night
The lighting of the screen is reduced with a dark
background color for the time period entered.
Hours (E) : minutes (F) to hours (G) : minutes (H).
1 Touch the appropriate button.
2 Set the time by turning the rotary knob and push
to confirm.
If the automatic changeover for the lighting of the
screen is switched on, the system will change over
at the times entered.
Configuration
Configuring the screen view Adjusting the selected format template

7 Touch a format template field (E).
Prerequisite: The Screen layout (A) page is
opened. The dialog for the field contents is displayed.
1 Touch the Views (B) tab. 8 Select the parameter, display format and dis-
play size for curves and parameter fields. See
2 Enter password and confirm with Enter. "Changing the display of monitoring fields"
The Views page is displayed. on page 85.
System setup
Locking the view against overwriting
A
z Touch the (G) button.
C
D All views are locked. The display of the monitoring
G F E B fields cannot be changed on the main page.
H
Deactivating the lock
z Touch the (F) button.
I
J Saving the view
133
1 Touch the (H) button.

Selecting the view
The current view for the selected view (View 1 to
Babylog VN500 opens the selection list for the View 3) is saved.
views. Three views can be configured (View 1 to
View 3).
Reset current view
4 Select the respective view by turning the rotary
knob and push to confirm. Each view can be reset individually, either to factory
or saved settings.
Selecting the format template Loading factory settings
The format templates can only be selected if the se- 1 Touch the Dräger default (I) button.
lected view is not locked. The (F) button is dark 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
green.
For information on the factory settings for View 1 to
5 Touch the (D) button. View 3, see chapter "Factory-set screen views"
Babylog VN500 opens the selection list containing on page 275.
the existing format templates. Loading saved settings
6 Select the desired template by turning the rotary 1 Touch the Load (J) button.
knob and push to confirm.
The selected format template is displayed (E).
Configuration
Overview of format templates

The following format templates are available for se-
lection:
K L K L L
K L K L L
L L K L
M
089
The (K), (L) and (M) fields can be configured with

customized settings. The following settings are
possible:
K L M
Loop Single parameter Single parameter
Double loop 2-Param. 2-Param.
Waveform Parameter groups Parameter groups
Trend Loop Trend
Trends table Trend Trends table
Alarm history Loop
Smart Pulmonary Double loop
View
Alarm history
Waveform
Smart Pulmonary
View
To display two parameters, parameter groups,

loops and double loops, the field size 2x is required.
To display double parameters, field size 1x is re-
quired. All fields can also be configured without
contents.
Configuration
Configuring the display of hospital- Additional information

specific measured values and settings Measured values are displayed in the list with a
blue background color and setting values with a
A maximum of 20 measured and setting values can green background color.
be grouped together. The hospital-specific mea-
sured and setting values are displayed on the
Trends/Data > Values > Customized data page. Assigning functions to additional
Prerequisite: The Screen layout (A) page is buttons
opened.
Additional buttons can be assigned in the main
1 Touch the Customized data (B) tab.
menu bar to enable direct access to a function or to
System setup directly open a page. The buttons are spatially as-
signed to the corresponding group.
A
Prerequisite: The Screen layout (A) page is
D
opened.
E
C 1 Touch the Config. buttons (B) tab.
B
System setup
A
134
Selecting a row in the list C D B

z Turn the rotary knob until the desired row is
marked in column 1 or 2 (C) or touch the row.
Configuring the display of hospital-specific

135
measured values
In the first column (C), the buttons can be selected
Prerequisite: The desired row is marked. for the left column of the main menu bar. In the sec-
1 Touch the Values (D) button. ond column (D), the buttons can be selected for the
right column of the main menu bar.
2 Select the parameter from the selection list with
the rotary knob and push to confirm. 2 Touch the button.
3 Select the desired button from the selection list
Configuring the display of hospital-specific with the rotary knob and push to confirm.
setting values Babylog VN500 displays the selected button in the
Prerequisite: The desired row is marked. main menu bar.
1 Touch the Settings (E) button.

2 Select the parameter from the selection list with
Configuration
Additional information Setup

For information on the display of additional buttons F G
and their spatial assignment in the main menu bar,
see "Main menu bar structure" on page 271.
Selecting parameters for the graphic

trend display
The graphic trend display for the Trends/Data >

Trends > Graphics 1 and Graphics 2 pages can J I H
138
be configured. The settings become effective with
the admission of a new patient. The measured values (F) are divided into the fol-
Prerequisite: The Screen layout (A) page is lowing parameter types:
opened. – Pressures
– Minute vol.
1 Touch the Trends graphic 1 (B) or Trends – Volume/Flow
graphic 2 (C) tab. – Gases
– Timing/Cycl.
System setup
– Others
A – Events
E The setting values (G) are divided into the following
D parameter types:
– Pressures
– Volume/Flow
E – Gases
D B
– Timing/Cycl.
C
– Others
2 Touch the corresponding button for a measured
137
value or a setting value.

Each page contains 2 graphic trend displays (D). A
Babylog VN500 opens another dialog containing all
maximum of 3 parameters can be configured for
the parameters of the selected parameter type (ex-
each trend display.
ample Volume/Flow).
Configuring the trend display Volume/Flow
1 Touch the (E) button.

VT
Babylog VN500 opens the Setup dialog with the
buttons for Meas. (F) and Settings (G). Flow
K
146
3 Touch the parameter. The button turns dark

green.
Configuration
4 Confirm with the OK button (K). Locking of therapy controls in therapy

The dialog for the parameter type is closed. bar
A maximum of 3 parameters can be selected for The therapy controls in the therapy bar can be
each graphic trend display. locked to prevent accidental changes from being
5 Select further parameters according to step 2 to made to the ventilation parameters.
4. Prerequisite: The Screen layout (A) page is
6 Confirm the selected measured values and set opened.
values with the OK button (H). 1 Touch the Therapy bar (B) tab.
The selected parameters are displayed in the trend
System setup
display. The Setup dialog is closed.
A
The selection can be aborted with Cancel (I). The
previous selection is displayed in the graphic trend. C D
Clear (J) can be used to delete all parameter selec-
tions made.
Deselecting a parameter in the trend display

z Touch the parameter to be deselected in the pa- B
rameter type dialog. The button turns pale
136
green.
2 Touch the On (C) button.
Selecting a time interval The therapy controls in the therapy bar are locked.
The ventilation parameters can only be changed in
System setup the Ventilation settings dialog window.
Canceling the lock

z On the Therapy bar page, touch the Off (D)
button.
L
137
7 Touch the (L) button. Select the time interval

from the selection list: 2, 4, 8, 12 hours, 1 day,
7 days.
Configuration
Configuring alarm settings
The customized settings for the start-up values of (C) upper alarm limit
the alarm limits become effective with the admis-
sion of a new patient. The customized alarm tone (D) lower alarm limit
settings are effective immediately, depending on
the time of day. The selection of the alarm tone se- 2 Touch the relevant button for the alarm limit.
quence is effective immediately.
1 Touch the System setup... button in the main push to confirm.
menu bar.
2 Touch the Alarms tab. Selecting the factory settings
3 Enter password and confirm with Enter. z Touch the Dräger default (E) button and con-
Babylog VN500 displays the following configurable firm with the rotary knob.
alarm settings in the overview:
– Start-up values for alarm limits
– Alarm volume and alarm tone
Setting start-up values for alarm limits
CAUTION
If several devices of the same type are used on a
ward, the alarm defaults must be configured iden-
tically on all devices. Other settings may jeopar-
dize the patient.
Prerequisite: The Alarms (A) page is opened.

1 Touch the Preset limits (B) tab.
System setup
A
C B
D
E
148
Babylog VN500 displays the start-up values used

for the alarm limits.
Configuration
Table of alarm limits

The following table lists the alarm limits with the set-
ting range and the factory-set start-up values
(Dräger default). The hospital-specific start-up val-
ues can be entered in the table.
Parameter Setting range Factory-set Hospital-specific set

start-up value start-up value
(Dräger default)
MV 1 to 100 % (VT x RR) +50 %
MV 1 to 100 % (VT x RR) –20 %
Paw 7 to 105 mbar 30 mbar
(7 to 105 cmH2O) (30 cmH2O)
RR 5 to 200/min, Off 50/min
Tapn 5 to 60 seconds 15 seconds
etCO2 1 to 98 mmHg 60 mmHg
etCO2 0 to 97 mmHg 30 mmHg
The alarm limits for the minute volume are set as a
percentage share of the start-up value (VT x RR).
To configure RR, see "Configuring start-up settings
for the ventilation parameters" on page 153.
For an overview of device's internal alarm limits,
see chapter "Automatic alarm limits" on page 231.
Configuration
Setting the alarm tone 5 Set the value for the sound level by night by
turning the rotary knob and push to confirm.
WARNING
The volume of the acoustic alarm must be set Activating the automatic sound level increase
loud enough to ensure that an alarm can be z Touch the Auto increase (E) button.
heard!
The Auto increase function can be set separately
Prerequisite: The Alarms (A) page is opened. for day and night.
1 Touch the Alarm vol./tone (B) tab.
Selecting alarm tone sequences
System setup
Babylog VN500 offers the following alarm tone se-
A quences:
C E
E (F) IEC/CEI as per IEC 60601-1-8
D
B (G) Dräger usual alarm tone sequences of
ventilation Dräger ventilators
F G z Touch the appropriate button.
H I Setting the priority of the battery alarm

149
The Internal battery activated alarm message in-

Set volume dicating the changeover to internal battery opera-
tion can be configured as a high or medium priority
2 For the day setting, touch the (C) button. alarm.
3 Set the value for the sound level by day by turn- z Touch the Medium (H) or High (I) button and
ing the rotary knob and push to confirm. and confirm.
4 For the night setting, touch the (D) button.
Configuring ventilation settings
The following ventilation configurations are possi- The customized ventilation settings become effec-
ble: tive with the admission of a new patient.
– Configuration of patient category for start-up
1 Touch the System setup... button in the main
– Configuration of main ventilation modes
menu bar.
– Configuration of start-up ventilation settings
– Configuration of general settings for ventilation 2 Touch the Ventilation tab.
– Configuration of settings for maneuvers
3 Enter password and confirm with Enter.
Configuration
Configuring start-up settings for the Prerequisite: The Ventilation (A) page is opened.
patient category 1 Touch the Modes (B) tab.
Prerequisite: The Ventilation (A) page is opened. System setup
1 Touch the Patient category (B) tab. A

C
System setup
A D B
B D
C
D
151
Babylog VN500 displays the start mode (C) and
3 ventilation modes (D). These ventilation modes
are displayed after Babylog VN500 has been start-
150
2 Touch the (C) button. ed in the Ventilation settings dialog window.
Babylog VN500 opens the selection list. The follow- The ventilation mode (E) configured under Other
ing patient categories are available for selection: modes is displayed as an additional mode for
– Pediatric patients only information purposes and can be changed in the
– Pediatric patients, neonates Ventilation settings dialog window.
– Neonates only 2 Touch the appropriate button.
3 Select the patient category with the rotary knob Babylog VN500 opens the ventilation mode selec-
and push to confirm. tion list.
Babylog VN500 displays the buttons for the 3 Select the mode with the rotary knob and push
selected patient category on the Start and to confirm.
Start/Standby pages.
If --- is configured for a ventilation mode, the corre-
sponding page is not available in the Ventilation
Configuring start-up settings for the settings dialog window.
ventilation modes The same ventilation mode cannot be configured
on two buttons.
CAUTION The button with the active ventilation mode is high-
If the ventilation start-up values are configured dif- lighted in gray and cannot be changed. The button
ferently to the Dräger standard values, this config- assignment can only be changed when another
uration must be identical on all Babylog VN500 ventilation mode is activated in the Ventilation set-
belonging to a ward. Other settings may jeopar- tings dialog window.
dize the patient. Depending on configuration, the number of dis-
played ventilation modes can vary between 1
and 4.
Configuration
Configuring start-up settings for the After the start of ventilation, Babylog VN500 begins
ventilation parameters ventilation with the start-up values, dependent on
the patient category set on the Start/Standby
Prerequisite: The Ventilation (A) page is opened. page.
1 Touch the Start settings (B) tab. Setting start-up values depending on the body
height/weight
System setup
Prerequisite: The VT, RR, Trigger (C) page is
A opened.
C 1 Touch the Weight (F) button and confirm with
D the rotary knob.
B System setup
E
C
F
147
Babylog VN500 displays the following pages for the

ventilation start-up settings: G
– VT, RR, Trigger
– Pressures, O2, I:E
H
– Other settings
163
– ATC
Babylog VN500 displays the start-up values for the
The VT, RR, Trigger (C) page appears by default. different body weights (G).
2 Touch the appropriate button (G).
Setting start-up values for VT, RR, Slope and
Flow trigger 3 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
push to confirm.
Depending on the patient category or the patient's
weight, these start-up values can be set: After the start of ventilation, Babylog VN500 begins
– VT ventilation with the start-up values, depending on
– RR the body height set on the Start/Standby page and
– Slope the ideal body weight derived from that, or with the
– Flow trigger set start-up body weight in the Neo. patient catego-
ry.
Setting start-up values depending on the
patient category
1 If not yet preset, touch the Patient (D) button
and confirm with the rotary knob.
Babylog VN500 displays the start-up values for the
different patient categories (E).
2 Touch the appropriate button (E).
push to confirm.
Configuration
Selecting the factory settings

z Touch the Dräger default (H) button and con-
firm with the rotary knob.
The Dräger default button also sets other start-up
settings on the Ventilation page and the Alarms
page to the factory settings.
Tables for start-up values

The following tables show the factory-set start-up
values (Dräger default) for VT, RR, Slope and
Flow trigger. The hospital-specific start-up values
can be entered in the table.
The following table applies to the selection of start-
up values depending on the patient category:
Factory-set start-up value Hospital-specific set start-up value

Patient VT RR Slope Flow VT RR Slope Flow
cat. trigger trigger
(mL) (/min) (s) (L/min) (mL) (/min) (s) (L/min)
Neo. 5.0 60 0.1 0.3
Ped. pat. 50 29 0.2 1.0
The following table applies to the selection of start-

up values depending on the body weight according
to the Radford nomogram:
Factory-set start-up value Hospital-specific set start-up value

Weight VT RR Slope Flow VT RR Slope Flow
trigger trigger
(kg) (mL) (/min) (s) (L/min) (mL) (/min) (s) (L/min)
0.5 3.0 100 0.05 0.2
5 36 32 0.2 1.0
15 110 26 0.2 1.0
Configuration
Setting start-up values for pressures, FiO2 and

I:E
Prerequisite: The Start settings (A) page is
opened.
1 Touch the Pressures, O2, I:E (B) tab.
System setup
B
C
D A
E
F h
G
152
2 Touch the corresponding button for the

parameters:
– Pressures (C)
– APRV pressures (D)
– Insp. flow (E)
– FiO2 (F)
– I:E (G)
push to confirm.
Selecting the factory settings

z Touch the Dräger default (H) button and con-
firm with the rotary knob.
The Dräger default button also sets other start-up
settings on the Ventilation page and the Alarms
page to the factory settings.
Parameter Factory-set start-up value Hospital-specific set

(Dräger default) start-up value
PEEP 5 mbar (5 cmH2O)
ΔPsupp 0 mbar (0 cmH2O)
Pinsp 15 mbar (15 cmH2O)
Pmax 40 mbar (40 cmH2O)
Plow 5 mbar (5 cmH2O)
Phigh 15 mbar (15 cmH2O)
Configuration
Parameter Factory-set start-up value Hospital-specific set

(Dräger default) start-up value
Insp. flow Patient category Neo.: 6 L/min
Patient category Ped. pat.: 10 L/min
FiO2 21 Vol%
I:E 1:2
Defining the start-up setting of the additional Defining start-up settings for tube
settings compensation
Prerequisite: The Start settings (A) page is Prerequisite: The Start settings (A) page is
opened. opened.
1 Touch the Other settings (B) tab. 1 Touch the ATC (B) tab.
System setup System setup
B B
C C
D
A A
E F
D G H
E I
J
153
154
The following settings can be switched on or off: The following settings can be switched on or off:
– Volume Guarantee (C) – Tube comp. (ATC) (C)
– Apnea Ventilation (D) – Expiratory compensation (D)
2 Touch the On or Off button. 2 Touch the On or Off button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
Inspiratory compensation can be selected for spon-
A start-up value can be set for the expiratory termi-
taneous and mandatory or only spontaneous
nation criterion Exp. term. (E):
breaths:
4 Touch the (E) button. – Spon+mand (E)
– Only spont. (F)
push to confirm. 3 Touch the appropriate button and confirm with
the rotary knob.
When you touch the Dräger default button on
another page, e. g., the Ventilation > Start In the Ped. pat. patient category, select the tube
settings page or the Alarms page, the settings are type:
also set to the factory settings.
4 Touch the ET (G) or Trach. (H) button and and
confirm.
Configuration
Enter the tube diameter (I) according to the Defining start-up settings for high-frequency
selected tube type: oscillation (HFO)
– ET: 2 to 8 mm
Prerequisite: The Start settings (A) page is
– Trach.: 2.5 to 8 mm
opened.
In the Neo. patient category, only the ET tube type
1 Touch the HFO (B) tab.
(G) is available.
System setup
Enter the tube diameter (I):
– ET: 2 to 5 mm
5 Touch the relevant button for the patient catego-
B
ry. C
6 Set the value for the tube diameter by turning D A
Enter degree of compensation (J) for the respective E
patient category: 0 to 100 %
F
7 Touch the relevant button for the patient catego-
314
ry.
8 Set the value for the degree of compensation by 2 Touch the corresponding button for the param-
turning the rotary knob and push to confirm. eters:
– VThf (C)
Babylog VN500 starts with the start-up settings – fhf (D)
selected for the ventilation parameters. – I:Ehf (E)
The customized settings for inspiratory and expira- – Ampl hf (F)
tory compensation are immediately effective when 3 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
ATC is set. push to confirm.
When you touch the Dräger default button on an-
other page, the settings for inspiratory and expira-
tory compensation are also set to the factory set-
tings.
Configuration
Configuring general settings Setting a maneuver
Prerequisite: The Ventilation (A) page is opened. Prerequisite: The Ventilation (A) page is opened.
1 Touch the General settings (B) tab. 1 Touch the Maneuver (B) tab.
System setup System setup

A A
C
G H I C D
D
B
B
E
F
156
155
The following settings can be switched on or off:
– Leakage Compensation (C) Setting the FiO2 concentration for the suction
– Automatic return from Apnea Ventilation (D) maneuver
– Pmax/Paw high autoset (E) For the suction maneuver, FiO2 is set based on the
– Anti Air Shower (F) current FiO2 concentration using a factor between
2 Touch the On or Off button as appropriate and 1.0 and 2.0.
confirm with the rotary knob. 2 Touch the (C) or (D) button.
Select Slope adjustment (G): 3 Set the factor by turning the rotary knob and
– Slope (H) push to confirm.
– Insp. flow (I)
Babylog VN500 starts with the selected start-up
3 Touch the appropriate button and confirm with settings.
the rotary knob.
Babylog VN500 starts with the selected settings.
Configuration
Importing and exporting configurations
Babylog VN500 can export the device configuration Importing a configuration from a USB storage
to a USB storage media. The configuration saved media to the device
on the USB storage media can be imported to other
A configuration can only be imported in standby
devices.
mode.
The following settings can be exported:
1 Switch Babylog VN500 to standby mode.
– Screen layout
– Alarms 2 Touch the Import (D) button.
– Ventilation
– System If there is no valid configuration saved on the USB
storage media, the system issues a message.
Only the values from the system setup are export-
ed. After the import, Babylog VN500 is switched off
automatically.
Views are only exported if the view configured was
first saved on the Screen layout page. 4 Switch on Babylog VN500 again.
z Insert the USB storage media into a USB port Babylog VN500 reports the completion of the con-
on Infinity C500. figuration with a low priority alarm.
1 Touch the System setup... button in the main 5 Check the settings after the configuration.
menu bar.
2 Touch the Config. exchange (A) tab. Exporting a configuration from the device to a
USB storage media
System setup
1 Touch the Export (E) button.
A
B D C
If the USB storage media already contains a config-
E uration, you are informed with a message stating
that this configuration will be overwritten.
157
Babylog VN500 displays the configuration on the

device (B) and the configuration available on the
USB storage media (C). The date of the import and
export is displayed.
Configuration
Installing applications
Babylog VN500 can be supplemented with addi-

tional Dräger applications. The applications are in-
stalled with a SIM card.
1 Insert the SIM card into the USB SIM card read-
er.
2 Insert the USB SIM card reader into a USB port
on Infinity C500.
menu bar.
4 Touch the Applications (A) tab.
System setup
A
C B
D
158
Babylog VN500 displays the already installed appli-

cations (B) and the applications available on the
SIM card (C).
Installing applications
1 Touch the Install (D) button.
2 Select the application from the (C) list with the
rotary knob and push to confirm.
The installed application is displayed in the (B) list.
3 Install the next applications (repeat steps 1
to 3).
4 After all applications are installed, restart
Babylog VN500.
Configuration
Exchange intervals
The user can configure after which service life peri- No display of exchange interval
od Babylog VN500 displays a message indicating
z Touch the (C) button. Set Off by turning the ro-
that the next exchange is due.
tary knob and push to confirm.
A message indicating when the next exchange is
due can be configured for the following accesso-
ries: Additional information
– Infinity ID breathing circuits (disposable)
Babylog VN500 displays the remaining service life
for the accessories on the Start/Standby >
WARNING
Accessory status page.
Disposable articles were developed, tested
and manufactured for disposable use only. Sterilization of the Infinity ID expiratory valve or in-
Disposable products must not be reused, respiratory valve may gradually impair the operation
processed or sterilized. Reuse, reprocessing of RFID transmission. This may mean that
or sterilization can lead to a failure of the ac- Infinity ID breathing circuit functions may not work
cessories and cause injuries to the patient. or may no longer work reliably. The service life for
the Infinity ID accessories is displayed with ---.
menu bar.
2 Touch the Exchange intervals (A) tab.
System setup
A
B
C
159
The exchange interval and the service life already

elapsed for the Infinity ID breathing circuit (B) are
displayed. The setting is effective immediately.
Setting the exchange interval

push to confirm.
Configuration
System settings
The following system settings can be configured: 2 Touch the (D) button.
– Language, date and time
Babylog VN500 opens the selection list containing
– Units for measured values and settings
the available languages.
– Network and serial interfaces
– Supply units 3 Select the language with the rotary knob and
– Service information push to confirm.
The customized settings are immediately effective.
Setting the date and time
1 Touch the System setup... button.
Babylog VN500 does not change over automatical-
2 Touch the System tab.
ly between daylight saving time and standard time.
Babylog VN500 displays the following configurable The user must change the time manually. Other-
settings in an overview: wise the times will be incorrect in the screen and for
– Country saved values and actions (e.g., in the logbook).
– Units
Changing the system time changes the time dis-
– Interface
played in trends, logbook, alarm history, maneuver
– Supply units
measured values and reference loops. The data
– Service
saved up to the change is displayed with the sys-
tem time up till then.
Selecting country-specific settings 1 Touch the appropriate button:
– Day (E)
Prerequisite: The System (A) page is opened. – Month (F)
– Year (G)
1 Touch the Country (B) tab. – Hours (H)
System setup – Minutes (I)
A The order of the (E) and (F) buttons varies depend-
ing on language.
C D
E F G B 2 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
H :
I J push to confirm.
K 3 After completing all the settings for the date and
time, touch the Apply (J) button and confirm
with the rotary knob.
160
Selecting the screen text language

Babylog VN500 is factory set to the customer's own
language. The current language is displayed in the
(C) field.
Selecting a different language:
Configuration
Entering the height above sea level Configure interfaces

The ambient pressure is considered in the calcula-
tion of measured values. The ambient pressure The communication settings can be configured to
sensor is checked for plausibility using the entered enable data to be exchanged with other devices.
height above sea level. Incorrect entries can mean
that the ambient pressure sensor is recognized as Serial interfaces
incorrect.
The data exchange takes place via the serial inter-
1 Touch the (K) button. faces (COM 1, COM 2 and COM 3) with MEDIBUS-
2 Set the height by turning the rotary knob and capable display devices, e. g., patient monitor or
push to confirm. Patient Data Management System.
Prerequisite: The System (A) page is opened.
1 Touch the Interface (B) tab.
Configuring units
System setup
Prerequisite: The System (A) page is opened. A
1 Touch the Units (B) tab.
C
System setup
D
A E B
C F
G
D B
E F
162
The COM (C) page appears by default. The set-
tings for COM 1, COM 2 and COM 3 are displayed.
2 Touch the relevant button for the interface pa-
161
rameters:
The units for the following parameters can be se-
– Protocol (D)
lected.
– Baud rate (E)
– Airway pressure (C)
– Parity (F)
– Body height (D)
– Stop bit (G)
– CO2 measured values (E)
– Alarm limit for etCO2 (F) 3 Select the setting with the rotary knob and push
to confirm.
2 Touch the relevant button for the unit.
The unit selected for the CO2 measured value is
adopted for selection of the alarm limit.
Configuration
External screen System setup E

If a second screen is connected to Infinity C500, A
the user has to make a setting indicating whether D C
the screen is analog or digital.
Prerequisite: The System (A) page is opened.
1 Touch the Interface (B) tab. B
2 Touch the External display (C) tab.
System setup
A
326
C Gas supply unit function GS500
B The gas supply unit function can be deactivated if

Babylog VN500 is equipped with a gas supply unit
that is currently not supposed to be used.
z Touch the Off (C) button.
The gas supply unit is no longer available. In the
320
device check, the system does not display the test

3 Touch the Digital or Analog button. step GS500 (gas supply unit).
4 Confirm with the rotary knob. Activating the gas supply unit function:
1 Touch the On (D) button.
Additional information Babylog VN500 displays in the message field (E)
The serial interface connectors are located on the that the device check has to be carried out.
rear of Infinity C500. 2 Perform device check.
Device extensions Additional information

Using the gas supply unit, see "Gas supply unit
Prerequisite: The System (A) page is opened. GS500" on page 99.
z Touch the Supply units (B) tab.
Service dialog
The service dialog is password-protected and re-

served for DrägerService or trained service person-
nel.
Alarm – Cause – Remedy
The alarm messages are displayed in the message

field of the header bar in hierarchical order.
Different background colors indicate the priority
level of the alarm.
In the tables for Current alarms and Alarm
history, the priority of the alarm messages is also
indicated by exclamation marks.
Warning !!! Red High priority alarm Immediate action is necessary in order to avert an
message imminent danger
Caution !! Yellow Medium priority Prompt action is necessary in order to avert a danger
alarm message
Note ! Cyan Low priority alarm Attention is necessary, but a delayed response is
message sufficient
In order to classify the alarms within an alarm cate-

gory, internal priority numbers are given after the
exclamation marks in the table below. The most
critical alarm is awarded the number 255. The pri-
ority of the alarm decreases the lower the number
is.
If several alarms occur simultaneously, the mes-
sage field in the header bar first displays the two
most critical alarms.
In the following table, the alarm messages are list-
ed in alphabetical order. If an alarm occurs, the ta-
ble helps to identify causes and remedies. The dif-
ferent causes and remedies should be worked
through in the order listed until the alarm has been
resolved.
Alarm Alarm Cause Remedy

priority
!! 050 "Audio paused" key used The "Audio paused" key is The function of the "Audio
too often either faulty or was pressed paused" key is not available
more than 80 times per while the defect exists.
hour.
If the defect cannot be rem-
edied, call DrägerService.
!! 050 "Audio paused" overused The "Audio paused" button Ventilation functions are not
or stuck is either stuck or faulty or affected.
was pressed for more than
Do not press the "Audio
6 seconds.
paused" button longer than
6 seconds.
If the error persists, call
DrägerService.
! 060 Accessory ID detection Accessory ID detection mal- Ventilation can be started
failed function. without ID functions.
Call DrägerService.
!! 110 Air and O2 supply insuffi- Air and O2 supply insuffi- Check connections to Air
cient cient to deliver required flow and O2 supply.
and pressure for HFO.
Make sure supply pressures
are greater than 3 bar
(43.5 psi).
Downgrade alarm priority by
touching "ALARM RESET"
button and confirm with rota-
ry knob.
!! 110 Air pressure regulation Internal Air supply pressure No medication nebulization
failed too high. possible.
Air pressure regulator fail- Call DrägerService.
ure.
!! 110 Air supply insufficient Air supply insufficient to de- Check connection to Air
liver required flow and pres- supply.
sure for HFO.
Make sure that the supply
Driver gas for active expira- pressure is greater than
tion during HFO is O2 only. 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Acknowledge message by
and confirm.

priority
! 100 Air supply low, GS500 ac- Central air supply low. Check connection to Air
tive supply.
Air is supplied by gas supply
unit GS500. Make sure supply pressure
is greater than 3 bar
Air supply is not required
(43.5 psi).
when FiO2 = 100 Vol.%.
Consider readjusting venti-
lation settings.
Remove connection to Air
supply if alarm condition
persists (to avoid reverse
flow into the Air supply).
Central Air supply insuffi- Check connection to central
cient. air supply and to gas supply
unit GS500.
Gas delivery system is sup-
plied with Air delivered by Make sure that the supply
GS500. pressure is greater than
3 bar (43.5 psi).
Adjust ventilation settings, if
necessary.
!!! 190 Airway obstructed? The ventilation unit applies Check patient condition.
only a very small volume Check tube or mask.
with each mechanical
breath. The tube or mask
could be blocked.
Patient breathes against the Check patient condition.
mechanical breaths during Check ventilation settings.
pressure-controlled ventila-
tion.
!!! 205 Airway pressure high Breathing hose kinked. Check breathing circuit.
Check tube or mask.
The upper alarm limit for the Check patient condition.
airway pressure has been Check ventilation settings.
exceeded. The patient is
breathing against the venti- Adjust alarm limit if neces-
lation unit or coughing. sary.

priority
!!! 200 Airway pressure low Leakage or disconnection. Check breathing circuit for
tight connections.
Check whether the expirato-
ry valve is properly en-
gaged.
Make sure that the tube or
mask is connected correctly.
!!! 140 Airway pressure negative Airway pressure has fallen Disconnect tube for suction-
below –10 mbar ing.
(–10 cmH2O). Check patient condition.
Check ventilation settings.
!! 140 Airway pressure negative Average airway pressure Disconnect tube for suction-
(averaged) has fallen below –2 mbar ing.
(–2 cmH2O). Check patient condition.
! 120 Alarm system failure Failure of primary alarm To continue ventilation with
speaker. this device, continuously
monitor the device func-
In case of an alarm situa-
tions.
tion, the auxiliary acoustical
alarm will sound. Call DrägerService.
!! 100 Ambient pressure sen- Altitude setting deviates too Check altitude setting and
sor? much from measured ambi- adjust if necessary.
ent pressure.
If the setting has been ad-
justed, the device check
must be repeated.
Ambient pressure sensor Accuracy of measured val-
failure. ues depending on the atmo-
spheric pressure could be
impaired (e.g., MV, O2 con-
centration).

priority
!!! 181 Apnea The patient has stopped Check patient condition.
breathing. Apply controlled ventilation if
necessary.
Obstruction. Check patient condition.
Check breathing circuit.
Check tube or mask.
Flow sensor is not calibrated Calibrate flow sensor and
or faulty. replace it if necessary.
!! 230 Apnea Ventilation Due to detected apnea, the Check patient condition.
ventilation unit has automat- Check tube or mask.
ically switched to Apnea
Ventilation. Check ventilation settings
and patient condition. Re-
turn to the original ventila-
tion mode by touching the
"Apn. Vent. reset" button
and confirm with rotary
knob.
! 020 Application already in- Application is already in- Acknowledge message by
stalled stalled. touching "ALARM RESET"
ry knob.
! 020 Application transfer failed Invalid application. Acknowledge message by
ry knob.
Application installation Acknowledge message by
failed. touching "ALARM RESET"
ry knob.

priority
!! 120 Auxiliary acoustical alarm Failure of auxiliary alarm To continue ventilation with
failure speaker. this device, continuously
In case of mains failure and
tions.
discharged battery, there is
no power failure alarm. Downgrade alarm priority by
In case of faulty primary
alarm speaker, there is no
ry knob.
acoustical alarm at all.
!! 105 Breath. circ. does not fit to Connected breathing circuit Use suitable breathing cir-
patient category does not fit to selected pa- cuit or select correct patient
tient category. category.
!! 100 Breathing circuit does not Breathing circuit has been Check breathing circuit.
match config. exchanged. The new
breathing circuit does not
pressing "ALARM RESET"
match the one that was
and confirm.
used before.
! 060 Breathing circuit ID invalid Accessory ID detection Replace ID Breathing Circuit
failed. or perform breathing circuit
check.
No automatic adjustment of
breathing circuit properties. Acknowledge message by
ry knob.
Accessory ID detection Replace Infinity ID Breathing
failed. Circuit
Breathing circuit exchange or
interval cannot be moni-
acknowledge message by
tored.
ry knob.
!! 205 Breathing hose kinked The pressure at the inspira- Check breathing circuit.
tory port is greater than Check mask.
30 mbar (30 cmH2O), e.g.
due to a kinked or blocked
hose, or a blocked mask.
!! 105 Breathing hoses inter- Inspiratory and expiratory Connect inspiratory and ex-
changed limbs of the breathing circuit piratory limbs of the breath-
are connected reversely to ing circuit correctly.
the ventilation unit.

priority
!!! 240 Calibration of gas delivery Technical malfunction de- Disconnect patient from the
system required tected during operation. device and continue ventila-
tion without delay using an-
Calibration of gas delivery
other independent ventilator.
system failed.
Recalibration necessary.
Perform device check.
Ventilation not possible.
! 012 Calibration of gas delivery Technical malfunction de- Perform device check.
system required tected in standby mode.
Do not start with ventilation
Calibration of gas delivery before device check is per-
system failed. formed: Ventilation will not
be possible.
Technical malfunction de- Perform device check.
tected in standby mode.
Calibration of gas delivery
system is due.
Accuracy of gas delivery
system could be impaired.
Technical malfunction de- Perform device check.
tected in standby mode.
Do not start with ventilation
Calibration of gas delivery before device check is per-
system failed. formed: Ventilation will not
be possible.
If alarm cannot be resolved
by performing device check,
call DrägerService.

priority
!!! 228 Calibration of neo. flow Calibration data is corrupt- Patient category "Neo-
sensor required ed. nates":
Calibrate neonatal flow sen-
sor.
If calibration was not suc-
cessful, deactivate neonatal
flow monitoring and use ex-
ternal flow monitoring.
Patient type "Pediatric pa-
tient":
Calibrate neonatal flow sen-
sor
If not successful:
Deactivate integrated neo-
natal flow monitoring and
use external flow monitor-
ing.
!! 115 Calibration of neo. flow After switching on the venti- Calibrate neonatal flow sen-
sensor required lation unit, the neonatal flow sor.
sensor needs to be calibrat-
ed.
!!! 228 Calibration of neonatal Calibration of neonatal flow Calibrate neonatal flow sen-
flow sensor failed sensor failed. sor.
Seal neonatal flow sensor
properly during calibration.
Neonatal flow sensor mal- Replace neonatal flow sen-
function. sor or sensor insert and cal-
ibrate the new sensor.
!! 118 Calibration of O2 sensor O2 measurement provides Calibrate O2 sensor.
required inaccurate values.
!! 100 Check CO2 cuvette The selected type of CO2 Select the correct type of
cuvette is not correct. CO2 cuvette.
CO2 cuvette or sensor Clean the CO2 cuvette or
soiled. sensor.

priority
!! 140 Check settings Loss of stored data was de- Check all settings and adjust
tected. if necessary.
ry knob.
!! 252 Check ventilation settings Due to data loss, the device Check all therapy settings
uses previous settings. and adjust them if neces-
sary.
ry knob.
!! 252 Check ventilation settings While adjusting ventilation The device may apply de-
settings or alarm limits, a fault settings. Check ventila-
power interruption occurred. tion settings and alarm lim-
its. Acknowledge message
by touching "ALARM RE-
SET" button and confirm
with rotary knob.
Data loss. The device may apply de-
fault settings. Check ventila-
tion settings and alarm lim-
its. Acknowledge message
by touching "ALARM RE-
with rotary knob.
!!! 144 Clean CO2 cuvette Cuvette or sensor window is Use clean cuvette and/or
soiled, e.g. with deposits clean CO2 sensor.
due to medication nebuliza- Perform zero calibration.
tion.
!!! 145 CO2 measurement failed CO2 sensor faulty. Replace faulty CO2 sensor.
CO2 measurement incor- Use external CO2 monitor-
rect. ing and deactivate integrat-
ed CO2 monitoring.

priority
!!! 146 CO2 sensor? Plug of CO2 sensor was re- Reinsert plug.
moved during operation.
CO2 sensor not positioned Place CO2 sensor on cu-
on cuvette. vette.
CO2 sensor faulty. Replace faulty CO2 sensor.
!!! 142 CO2 zero calibration? Zero point of the CO2 sen- Perform zero calibration.
sor is outside of the toler-
ance range.
Zero calibration of CO2 sen- Perform zero calibration cor-
sor failed. rectly.
Cuvette or sensor window is Use clean cuvette and/or
soiled, e.g. with deposits clean CO2 sensor.
due to medication nebuliza-
tion.
! 100 Cockpit restarted Internal communication er- Check all therapy settings
ror caused restart of the and adjust them if neces-
cockpit. sary.
ry knob.
!! 252 Data loss Loss of stored data was de- To continue ventilation with
tected. this device, continuously
tions.
ry knob.

priority
!! 240 Device check failed A safety-related failure was Do not use this device for
detected during device ventilation therapy.
check.
Check assembly and posi-
tion of expiratory valve.
Replace expiratory valve if
required.
Do not use this device for
ventilation therapy unless
the device check was re-
peated successfully.
! 100 Device check incomplete Device check not complete- Perform device check.
ly performed or partially un-
successful.
ry knob.
!!! 253 Device failure Due to missing measure- Immediately disconnect the
ments, ventilation is not pos- patient from the device and
sible anymore. continue ventilation without
delay using another inde-
pendent ventilator.
!!! 253 Device failure (1) Internal safety system fail- Disconnect patient from the
ure. device and continue ventila-
!!! 253 Device failure (2) Internal safety system fail- Do not use this device for
ure. ventilation therapy.
!!! 253 Device failure (3) Internal communication fail- Disconnect patient from the

priority
!!! 253 Device failure (4) Defective system data stor- Disconnect patient from the
age media detected. device and continue ventila-
Switch off the device.
!!! 253 Device failure (5) Gas delivery system faulty. Disconnect patient from the
device and continue ventila-
!!! 253 Device failure (8) Test alarm which should Disconnect patient from the
only be triggered during device and continue ventila-
maintenance. tion without delay using an-
!! 100 Device failure (9) No mass storage device Acknowledge message by
found. touching "ALARM RESET"
ry knob.
!!! 200 Device temperature high The internal device temper- Disconnect patient from the
ature is too high. device and continue ventila-
Switch off the device.

priority
!! 141 Device temperature mea- Failure of the internal To continue ventilation with
surement failed breathing-gas temperature this device, use external
measurement. breathing gas temperature
monitoring.
In case of a too high breath-
ing-gas temperature, there Call DrägerService.
is no alarm.
!! 141 Device temperature mea- Failure of the internal tem- To continue ventilation with
surement failed perature measurement. this device, continuously
No alarm in case of a too
tions.
high device temperature.
!!! 200 Disconnection? Leakage or disconnection. Check breathing circuit for
tight connections.
gaged.
!!! 138 etCO2 high Upper alarm limit for end-ex- Check patient condition.
piratory CO2 concentration
has been exceeded.
Adjust alarm limit if neces-
sary.
Perform CO2 zero calibra-
tion if necessary.
!!! 138 etCO2 low Lower alarm limit for end-ex- Check patient condition.
piratory CO2 concentration
has been exceeded.
sary.
Perform CO2 zero calibra-
tion if necessary.
!! 100 Expiratory valve incom- Incompatible expiratory Replace expiratory valve.
patible valve connected to the sock-
et.
!!! 220 Expiratory valve malfunc- Expiratory valve is not prop- Insert expiratory valve cor-
tion erly connected to the sock- rectly.
et.
Expiratory valve faulty. Replace expiratory valve.

priority
!!! 130 FiO2 high O2 sensor is not calibrated. Calibrate O2 sensor.
Mixer function faulty. Call DrägerService.
!!! 130 FiO2 low O2 sensor is not calibrated. Calibrate O2 sensor.
Mixer function faulty. Call DrägerService.
!! 100 Flow measurement inac- Flow sensor is not calibrated Calibrate flow sensor and
curate or faulty. replace it if necessary.
Water in flow sensor. Drain water trap of breathing
circuit. Dry flow sensor.
Flow measurement is not re- To continue ventilation with
liable. Expiratory minute vol- this device, use external
ume exceeds minute vol- flow monitoring and deacti-
ume delivered by the venti- vate integrated flow monitor-
lation unit. ing.
This could impair the quality
of ventilation.
! 110 GS500 communication Communication to gas sup- Check communication con-
failure ply unit GS500 lost. nection to gas supply unit
GS500.
and confirm.
!!! 100 GS500 failure Air supply insufficient to de- Check connection to gas
liver required flow and pres- supply unit GS500.
sure.
If this condition persists, call
Gas delivery system sup- DrägerService.
plied with O2 only.
Ventilation continues with
O2 only.
!! 110 GS500 internal failure Gas supply unit GS500 has Restart gas supply unit
reported a failure. GS500.
If the condition persists, call
DrägerService.
!!! 110 GS500 temperature too Gas supply unit GS500 tem- Switch off the device.
high perature is too high.

priority
!!! 249 HFO not possible Gas supply unable to deliver Check connections to Air
required flow and pressure and O2 supply.
for active expiration during
HFO.
(43.5 psi).
If supply pressures are cor-
rect: Call DrägerService.
When the gas supply unit is
active, change to a different
ventilation mode.
! 060 ID tag of expiratory valve Accessory ID detection Replace Infinity ID Expirato-
faulty failed. ry Valve
Expiratory valve exchange or
interval cannot be moni-
acknowledge message by
tored.
ry knob.
! 020 Import failed, check set- Configuration import failed. Check all settings and adjust
tings if necessary.
ry knob.
! 020 Import successful, check Configuration import was Check all settings and adjust
settings successful. if necessary.
ry knob.
! 150 Inspiratory hold interrupt- The "Man. insp./hold" button Release "Man. insp./hold"
ed was pressed too long. button.
!!! 160 Internal battery activated The ventilation unit is pow- Connect device to the mains
ered by the internal battery supply.
as there is no mains supply.
The maximum operating
time with power from the in-
ternal battery is 30 minutes.

priority
!! 200 Internal battery activated The ventilation unit is pow- Connect device to the mains
ered by the internal battery supply.
as there is no mains supply.
The maximum operating
time with power from the in-
ternal battery is 30 minutes.
!!! 254 Internal battery dis- The operating time with Connect device immediately
charged power from the internal bat- to the mains supply.
tery has expired.
!! 120 Internal battery failure In case of mains failure, To continue ventilation with
there is no internal battery this device, continuously
back-up available. monitor the device func-
tions.
!!! 250 Internal battery low The operating time with Connect device to the mains
power from the internal bat- supply.
tery is less than 2 minutes.
!! 120 Internal power supply fail- Technical failure detected. To continue ventilation with
ure this device, continuously
tions.
! 140 Leakage Only monitored for intubat- Check for leakages in
ed patients! breathing circuit.
The measured relative leak- Make sure that the tube is
age exceeds 55 %. connected correctly.
!!! 205 Mean airway pressure Mean airway pressure ex- Check patient condition.
high ceeds the set value by more Check ventilation settings.
than 5 mbar (5 cmH2O).
!!! 200 Mean airway pressure low Measured Pmean is 5 mbar Check breathing circuit for
(5 cmH2O) less than set tight connections.
Pmean. Check whether the expirato-
gaged.
Make sure that the tube is
connected correctly.

priority
! 008 MEDIBUS communica- MEDIBUS communication Ventilation functions are not
tion failed failure. affected.
Check MEDIBUS connec-
tion.
Check MEDIBUS settings.
!! 110 Medication nebulization Air and O2 supply insuffi- Check connections to Air
canceled cient to deliver required flow and O2 supply.
and pressure for medication
nebulization.
Medication nebulization (43.5 psi).
canceled.
ry knob.
Inspiratory flow insufficient Increase inspiratory flow to
for medication nebulization. more than 6 L/min for neo-
nates and pediatric patients.
ry knob.
Air supply insufficient to de- Check connection to Air
sure for medication nebuli-
Make sure supply pressure
zation.
(43.5 psi).
ry knob.
O2 supply insufficient to de- Check connection to O2
zation.
(43.5 psi).
ry knob.

priority
Internal supply pressures Acknowledge message by
too high. touching "ALARM RESET"
Air and O2 supply insuffi-
ry knob.
cient to deliver required flow
and pressure for medication Call DrägerService.
nebulization.
Neonatal flow monitoring Deactivate neonatal flow
active. monitoring and remove neo-
natal flow sensor.
Medication nebulization is
only possible if neonatal Acknowledge message by
flow monitoring is deactivat- touching "ALARM RESET"
ed and neonatal flow sensor button and confirm with rota-
is removed from breathing ry knob.
circuit.
Incompatible ventilation Select an appropriate venti-
mode. lation mode.
Medication nebulization is Acknowledge message by
only possible in pressure- touching "ALARM RESET"
controlled ventilation modes button and confirm with rota-
without Volume Guarantee. ry knob.
! 100 Medication nebulization Medication nebulization fin- Install neonatal flow sensor.
finished ished or canceled. Switch on neonatal flow
monitoring.
and confirm.
!! 100 Medication nebulizer uses O2 supply insufficient to de- Check connection to O2
Air only liver required flow and pres- supply.
zation.
Medication nebulizer is sup- (43.5 psi).
plied with Air only.
Increased deviation from touching "ALARM RESET"
the set FiO2. button and confirm with rota-
ry knob.

priority
!! 100 Medication nebulizer uses Air supply insufficient to de- Check connection to Air
O2 only liver required flow and pres- supply.
zation.
Medication nebulizer is sup- (43.5 psi).
plied with O2 only.
Increased deviation from touching "ALARM RESET"
the set FiO2. button and confirm with rota-
ry knob.
!!! 160 MV high The minute volume exceeds Check patient condition.
the upper alarm limit. Check ventilation settings.
sary.
Water in flow sensor. Drain water trap of breathing
circuit. Dry flow sensor.
!!! 160 MV low The minute volume has fall- Check patient condition.
en below the lower alarm Check ventilation settings.
limit.
sary.
Obstruction. Check patient condition.
Check breathing circuit.
Check tube or mask.
Leakage or disconnection. Check breathing circuit for
tight connections.
gaged.
Device failure. Disconnect patient from the

priority
!!! 228 Neonatal flow measure- Neonatal flow measurement In case of modes with tidal
ment failed malfunction. volume or trigger setting:
Change ventilation mode if
required.
Use external flow monitoring
and deactivate the integrat-
ed flow monitoring.
In case of modes without tid-
al volume or trigger setting:
Ventilation functions are not
affected.
To continue ventilation with
this device, use external
flow monitoring and deacti-
vate the integrated neonatal
flow monitoring.

priority
!!! 228 Neonatal flow sensor fail- Neonatal flow sensor cable Replace neonatal flow sen-
ure faulty. sor cable.
Neonatal flow sensor faulty. Replace neonatal flow sen-
sor or sensor insert and cal-
Neonatal flow measurement In case of modes with tidal
malfunction. volume or trigger setting:
Change ventilation mode if
required.
Use external flow monitoring
and deactivate the integrat-
ed flow monitoring.
In case of modes without tid-
al volume or trigger setting:
Ventilation functions are not
affected.
this device, use external
flow monitoring and deacti-
vate the integrated neonatal
flow monitoring.
! 100 Neonatal flow sensor re- Reconnection of the neona- Confirm message if calibrat-
placed? tal flow sensor detected. ed neonatal flow sensor is
still used.
Otherwise calibrate neona-
tal flow sensor.
Neonatal flow monitoring Confirm message if calibrat-
was temporarily deactivated neonatal flow sensor is
ed. still used.
Otherwise calibrate neona-
tal flow sensor.
!! 115 Neonatal flow sensor Water or secretion in the Replace neonatal flow sen-
soiled neonatal flow sensor. sor or sensor insert and cal-

priority
!!! 229 Neonatal flow sensor? Neonatal flow sensor is not Check connections of the
connected. neonatal flow sensor and
cable.
Neonatal flow sensor mal- Replace neonatal flow sen-
function. sor or sensor insert and cal-
!!! 250 No Air supply Air supply insufficient to de- Check connection to Air
sure.
Gas delivery system sup- is greater than 3 bar
plied with O2 only. (43.5 psi).
Ventilation continues with Consider readjusting venti-
O2 only. lation settings.
! 100 No Air supply Air supply insufficient. Check connection to Air
supply.
If FiO2 = 100 Vol%, Air sup-
ply is not required. Make sure supply pressure
(43.5 psi).
lation settings.
!!! 250 No O2 supply O2 supply insufficient to de- Check connection to O2
sure.
Gas delivery system sup- is greater than 3 bar
plied with Air only. (43.5 psi).
Ventilation continues with Consider readjusting venti-
Air only. lation settings.
Remove connection to O2
flow into the O2 supply).

priority
! 100 No O2 supply O2 supply insufficient. Check connection to O2
supply.
If FiO2 = 21 Vol%, O2 supply
is not required. Make sure supply pressure
(43.5 psi).
lation settings.
Remove connection to O2
flow into the O2 supply).
!!! 132 O2 measurement failed O2 measurement provides Calibrate O2 sensor.
invalid values.
this device, use external O2
monitoring and deactivate
integrated O2 monitoring.
!! 110 O2 pressure regulation Internal O2 supply pressure No medication nebulization
failed too high. possible.
O2 pressure regulator fail- Call DrägerService.
ure.
!! 040 Oxygenation maneuver Internal error during oxy- Do not perform suction ma-
failed genation maneuver. neuver until the device was
checked.
!!! 140 PEEP high Expiratory valve or breath- Check breathing circuit and
ing circuit obstructed. expiratory valve.
Check for condensate.
Expiratory resistance in- Check viral/bacterial filter.
creased. Replace it if necessary.

priority
!!! 140 PEEP low Measured PEEP is 5 mbar Check breathing circuit for
(5 cmH2O) less than set tight connections.
PEEP. Check whether the expirato-
gaged.
!! 210 Perform device and Device check and breathing Perform device check.
breathing circuit check circuit check must be per-
formed before operation.
ry knob.
!!! 140 Plow high Expiratory valve or breath- Check breathing circuit and
ing circuit obstructed. expiratory valve.
Check for condensate.
Expiratory resistance in- Check viral/bacterial filter.
creased. Replace it if necessary.
Not monitored if AutoRe- To enable monitoring switch
lease is enabled. off AutoRelease or increase
Tlow to >1 second.
Not monitored if Tlow is set
to less than 1 second.
!!! 140 Plow low Measured Plow is 5 mbar (5 Check breathing circuit for
cmH2O) less than set Plow. tight connections.
gaged.
! 140 Pressure limited The pressure of a breath is Check patient condition.
limited by the set "Paw high" Check ventilation settings.
limit or Pmax.
Adjust "Paw high" alarm limit
or Pmax.

priority
! 140 Pressure limited! VT not The pressure of a breath is Check patient condition.
reached limited by the set "Paw high" Check ventilation settings.
limit or Pmax. The set vol-
ume could not be delivered. Adjust "Paw high" alarm limit
or Pmax.
!!! 238 Pressure measurement Pressure measurement Disconnect patient from the
failed malfunction. device and continue ventila-
!! 140 Pressure measurement Pressure measurement Accuracy of measured val-
impaired malfunction. ues based on pressure
could be impaired.
this device, continuously
tions.
!! 100 Pressure measurement Fluid in expiratory valve. Replace expiratory valve.
inaccurate Clean and dry used one.
Pressure measurement fail- Disconnect patient from the
!! 140 Pressure sensor? Ventila- Ventilation patterns for To continue ventilation with
tion impaired which a pressure sensor is this device, use external
necessary cannot be per- pressure monitoring.
formed. The ventilation unit
applies back-up ventilation.
!!! 150 Respiratory rate high The patient is breathing at a Check patient condition.
high respiratory rate. Check ventilation settings or
spontaneous respiratory
rate.
sary.
Auto triggering caused by Drain water trap of breathing
water in the breathing cir- circuit. Dry flow sensor.
cuit. Check breathing circuit.

priority
! 100 Restart of ventilation unit Technical failure detected. Downgrade alarm priority by
delayed Last restart was delayed. touching "ALARM RESET"
ry knob.
this device, continuously
tions.
!! 050 Rotary knob stuck or The rotary knob is either If you are still pressing the
pressed too long faulty or was pressed for rotary knob, release it. Oth-
more than 20 seconds with- erwise press and turn rotary
out turning. knob repeatedly. If alarm
condition persists, settings
cannot be adjusted any-
more.
Disconnect patient from the
!! 050 Rotary knob used too of- The rotary knob is either Press and turn rotary knob
ten faulty or was pressed more repeatedly.
than 5 times per second.
If alarm condition persists,
settings cannot be adjusted
anymore.
Disconnect patient from the
!!! 255 Standby mode activated Device has been switched Acknowledge standby mode
to standby mode. by touching "ALARM RE-
with rotary knob.
!! 040 Suction maneuver failed Internal error during suction Do not perform suction ma-
maneuver. neuver until the device was
checked.

priority
! 140 Suction maneuver over- The suction maneuver has Perform suction maneuver
used? been performed more than 5 less frequently.
times within an hour.
!! 255 Ventilation unit restarted Internal communication er- Check all therapy settings
ror caused restart of the and adjust them if neces-
ventilation unit. sary.
ry knob.
! 120 Volume measurement in- Flow measurement is not re- Calibrate flow sensor and
accurate liable. replace it if necessary.
Perform device check and
!! 166 VT low For more than eight breaths, Check ventilation settings.
the applied VT has been Check patient condition.
less than 90% of the set VT.
! 140 VT not reached, leakage Set volume cannot be Check for leakages in
reached. Flow delivery ter- breathing circuit.
minated. Make sure that the tube or
! 140 VThf not reached Tidal volume could not be Check patient condition.
reached due to increased Check ventilation settings.
resistance.
Tidal volume could not be Reduce fhf or increase I:Ehf
reached due to pressure towards 1:1.
limitation of the device.
Cleaning, Disinfection and Sterilization
Safety information on reprocessing . . . . . . . 194
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Observe before dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dismantling neonatal flow sensor. . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dismantling the pneumatic medication
nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
CO2 sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Disconnecting the breathing circuit. . . . . . . . . . 196
Dismantling Infinity ID neonatal expiratory
valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Dismantling the inspiratory unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Dismantling and reprocessing accessories . . . 198
Reprocessing methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Machine cleaning and disinfection . . . . . . . . . . 199
Manual cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Manual disinfection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Visual inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Sterilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Reprocessing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Assembling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Assembling Infinity ID neonatal expiratory
valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Assembling the inspiratory unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Assembling accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Before reusing on patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Safety information on reprocessing
CAUTION The reprocessing recommendations do not exempt

staff from the obligation to adhere to the hygiene re-
To reduce the risk of infection to both hospital staff
quirements and directives on occupational health
and patients, the device must be cleaned and dis-
and safety relating to the reprocessing of medical
infected whenever it has been used. Protective
devices.
clothing, eye protection etc. must be worn.
To ensure the professional reprocessing of medical
z Note the hospital hygiene regulations! devices, the recommendations provided by the
Robert Koch Institute in "Demands on Hygiene in
z Reprocess the device after every patient.
Reconditioning Medical Products" must be fol-
lowed.
Dismantling
This chapter describes how to disconnect the ven- Dismantling neonatal flow sensor ISO 15
tilation accessories and dismantle them for repro- (8411130)
cessing.
Observe before dismantling
1 Switch off the device and breathing gas humid-

ifier and remove their power plugs. C
A
2 Drain the water traps and breathing hoses. Note D
the hospital hygiene regulations!
B
3 Drain the water container of the breathing gas
309
humidifier.
1 Disconnect the flow sensor cable (A) from the
Dismantling neonatal flow sensor 2 Press the buttons (B) on both sides while pulling
the insert (C) out of its housing.
z Unplug sensor connector at the rear of the de-
vice. 3 Pull housing (D) out of the Y-piece.
Reprocessing the ISO 15 neonatal flow sensor

(8411130)
z Observe related instructions for use.
z Reprocess the insert of the neonatal flow sen-
sor immediately after every use.
z Reprocess housing of the neonatal flow sensor 3 Remove the catheter connector (C) from the in-
in accordance with the reprocessing list, let port.
see page 202.
4 Pull the adapter (D) out of the outlet port.
5 Remove the corrugated hose (E) from the
Dismantling neonatal flow sensor Y-piece
adapter (D).
(8410185)
6 Dismantle the medication nebulizer in accor-
dance with the corresponding Instructions for
Use.
Reprocessing the medication nebulizer and

A parts for adapting
B z Reprocess the individual parts of the medica-

tion nebulizer in accordance with the corre-
sponding Instructions for Use.
301
1 Disconnect the flow sensor cable (A) from the z Reprocess the parts for adapting in accordance
neonatal flow sensor. with the reprocessing list, see page 202.
2 Unplug the Y-piece with integrated neonatal
flow sensor (B) from the breathing hoses.
CO2 sensor
Reprocessing neonatal flow sensor Y-piece

Dismantling the CO2 sensor
(8410185)
1 Remove the CO2 sensor plug from the socket.
z Observe related instructions for use.
A
Dismantling the pneumatic medication
nebulizer
C B
E D C 175
2 Remove the CO2 sensor (A) from the cuvette.

3 Remove the cuvette (B) of the CO2 sensor from
A the Y-piece.
B
4 Remove the catheter cone (C) from the cuvette.
044
1 Remove the nebulizer hose (A) from the medi-

cation nebulizer (B) and from the nebulizer port
on the device.
2 Remove the medication nebulizer (B) from the
breathing circuit.
Reprocessing the CO2 sensor and test filter Disconnecting the breathing circuit
1 Wipe off any dirt, particularly inside and outside
the windows, using a soft disposable tissue and
cotton swabs.
2 Reprocess the CO2 sensor and test filter in ac-
cordance with the reprocessing list,
A
see page 202. A
Reprocessing reusable cuvettes

Only reusable cuvettes (6870280) can be repro-
cessed. Disposable cuvettes are not temperature-
resistant and may be destroyed. Dispose of dispos-
able cuvettes. B
1 Wipe off any dirt, particularly inside and outside
the windows, using a soft disposable tissue and
057
cotton swabs, under running water if necessary.
1 Remove the breathing hoses from the inspirato-
2 Reprocess the reusable cuvette in accordance
ry port and the expiratory port (A).
with the reprocessing list, see page 202.
CAUTION
Disposable cuvettes When removing the breathing hoses, always hold
them at the connection sleeve and not at the spiral
z Dispose of disposable cuvettes for each patient,
ribbing! Otherwise, the breathing hose may be
at the latest weekly.
damaged.
2 If fitted: Remove the water trap (B) from the

breathing hose.
3 Remove the collection container from the water
trap. Empty the collection container. Note the
hospital hygiene regulations!
Reprocessing the breathing circuit

z Reprocess the breathing hoses, water trap and
collection container and also the Y-piece in ac-
cordance with the reprocessing list,
see page 202.
Dismantling Infinity ID neonatal 3 Remove the collection container (D) from the
expiratory valve water trap. Empty the collection container. Note
the hospital hygiene regulations!
Removing the expiratory valve

Reprocessing the expiratory valve
z Reprocess the expiratory valve, diaphragm, si-
A lencer and collection container removed from
the water trap in accordance with the repro-
cessing list, see page 202.
After cleaning and disinfection
z After cleaning and disinfecting, always sterilize
the expiratory valve in hot steam at 134 °C
(273.2 °F) to ensure all remaining liquid is dried
completely in the interior areas.
073
The expiratory valve can be reused as long as the

1 Turn the locking ring (A) as far as possible to the test point in the device check is passed. Exchange
left. the expiratory valve if signs of wear become visible,
such as cracks in the plastic parts, deformation and
2 Remove the expiratory valve from the fitting.
hardening of the rubber parts. Discolorations of the
metal insert do not impair its function.
Dismantling the expiratory valve
Dismantling the inspiratory unit
When the inspiratory unit must be reprocessed:

B The inspiratory unit must only be reprocessed
when patient gas has passed through the safety
valve. In the case of spontaneously breathing pa-
C tients, this can occur in the following situations:
– Excess pressure in the system caused by a kink
in the expiratory hose
031
1 Remove the silencer (B) from the expiratory – Failure of both supply gases
valve. – Complete failure of the electrical supply (failure
of mains power supply and discharged or defec-
2 Remove the diaphragm (C). tive internal batteries)
Removing the inspiratory unit

The inspiratory unit should only be removed when
the device is switched off.
D
046
Dismantling and reprocessing

accessories
z Dismantle and reprocess the breathing gas hu-

midifier, the Aeroneb Pro nebulizer and bacteri-
A al filter in accordance with the corresponding In-
B
structions for Use.
036
1 Press and hold the locking lever (A) on the un-

derside of the inspiratory unit.
2 At the same time, turn the inspiratory unit (B)
approx. 20° in a counterclockwise direction.
3 Remove the inspiratory unit from the fitting.
Dismantling the inspiratory unit
C
197
1 Remove the diaphragm with adapter (C) from

the fitting of the inspiratory unit.
2 Do not dismantle the inspiratory unit any further.
Reprocessing the inspiratory unit

z Reprocess the inspiratory unit and diaphragm in
accordance with the reprocessing list,
see page 202.
After cleaning
z After cleaning, always sterilize the inspiratory
unit in hot steam at 134 °C (273.2 °F) to ensure
all remaining liquid is dried completely in the in-
terior areas.
Reprocessing methods
Machine cleaning and disinfection 3 Allow parts to dry thoroughly.
Use a washer-disinfector in accordance with Cleaning agent

EN ISO 15883, preferably with a cart for anesthesia
and respiration accessories, for automatic cleaning The material compatibility and effectiveness for re-
and disinfection. Use mild alkaline or enzymatic usable Dräger accessories was tested with various
(with neutral pH) cleaning agents. The user must be mildly alkaline and enzymatic cleaning agents, and
sure to observe the manufacturer’s information on at 93 °C (199.4 °F) for 10 minutes.
the cleaning agent exactly. The test showed good material compatibility and ef-
fectiveness for the following cleaning agents:
Placing parts in washer-disinfector – Neodisher MediClean manufactured by
Dr. Weigert
z Place parts in washer-disinfector. Observe in-
structions for use of washer-disinfector. The user must be sure to observe the manufactur-
er’s information on the cleaning agent exactly.
z Position parts so that all interior spaces are
completely flushed (e.g., hoses, valve assem-
blies) and water can drain off freely. Ensure all
Manual cleaning
areas are cleaned.
Keep spring-loaded valves open (water trap, If no washer-disinfector is available, clean parts
pneumatic medication nebulizer) during clean- manually under running water with cleaning agents.
ing and disinfection, e.g., with rubber ring.
Cleaning agent
Cleaning program
The material compatibility and effectiveness for re-
z Select the suitable program (preferably the an- usable Dräger accessories was tested with these
esthetics program). Cleaning is carried out at cleaning agents:
40 to 60 °C (104 to 140 °F) for at least – Neodisher LM manufactured by Dr. Weigert
5 minutes. (concentration: 3 %, application time:
30 minutes)
Thermal disinfection The user must be sure to observe the manufactur-
er’s information on the cleaning agent exactly.
1 Thermal disinfection is carried out at 80 to 95 °C
(176 to 203 °F) and with corresponding contact
time.
2 Carry out final rinsing with deionized water.
After ending cleaning and disinfection program

1 Immediately remove parts from washer-disin-
fector.
2 Inspect parts for visible soiling. If necessary, re-
peat cycle or clean manually.
Cleaning manually The test showed good material compatibility and ef-
fectiveness for the following disinfectants:
The user must be sure to observe the manufactur-
er’s information on the cleaning agent exactly. Surface disinfectant (for device surfaces)
– Buraton 10F manufactured by Schülke & Mayr
1 Wash off soiling on surface under running wa-
ter. Instrument disinfectant (for components or acces-
sories):
2 Use cleaning agents in accordance with manu-
– Korsolex extra manufactured by Bode Chemie
facturers specifications. Make sure that all sur-
(concentration: 3 %, contact time: 15 minutes)
faces to be cleaned can be efficiently reached
(e.g. inside hoses). Use suitable brushes if nec- The composition of the disinfectant is the responsi-
essary. bility of the manufacturer and can change over
time.
Do not use any brushes for the flow sensor. Ob-
serve related instructions for use.
Disinfecting surfaces
Keep spring-loaded valves open (water trap,
pneumatic medication nebulizer).
WARNING
3 Rinse parts sufficiently under running water un- Penetrating liquid may impair the correct
til no cleaning agent residues can be recog- functioning of the device or damage the de-
nized. vice and endanger the patient! Only disinfect
4 Inspect parts for visible soiling and damage. parts by wiping and make sure no liquids pen-
Repeat manual cleaning if necessary. etrate into the device.
5 Using an ultrasonic bath improves the cleaning z Following manual cleaning, carry out surface
results. disinfection.
z Remove disinfectant residues.
Manual disinfection
Disinfecting components or accessories
Manual disinfection can be carried out preferably 1 Disinfect parts by immersing.
with disinfectants based on aldehydes or quaterna-
ry ammonia compounds. The effectiveness of the 2 Sufficiently rins parts under running water until
disinfectants to be used must be proven. Observe no disinfectant residues can be recognized.
the applicable country-specific listings. The list of 3 Inspect parts for visible soiling and damage.
the Association for Applied Hygiene (VAH List) ap- Repeat manual disinfection if necessary.
plies in German-speaking countries. The user must
be sure to observe the manufacturer’s information 4 Shake off all excess water. Allow parts to dry
on the disinfectant exactly. thoroughly.
Disinfectants
The material compatibility and effectiveness of var-
ious disinfectants was tested for Dräger accesso-
ries to be reprocessed.
Visual inspection
z Inspect all parts for signs of damage and wear,

such as the formation of cracks, brittleness or
strong hardening.
Even accessories designed to be reused (e.g. after
reprocessing) have a limited service life. Due to a
number of factors connected with handling and re-
processing (e.g.disinfectant residues can attack the
material more intensely during autoclaving), in-
creased wear can occur and the service life can be
markedly shortened. These parts must be replaced
if signs of wear become visible, such as cracks, de-
formation, discoloration, peeling, etc.
Sterilization
Sterilize only parts that have been cleaned and dis-

infected.
Use a vacuum steam sterilizer (in accordance with
DIN EN 285), preferably with fractional vacuum, for
sterilization.
CAUTION
Do not sterilize parts in ethylene oxide! Ethylene
oxide may diffuse into the parts and cause dam-
age to health.
z Hot steam sterilization can be carried out at

134 °C (273.2 °F). Observe instructions for use
of device.
z To ensure the effectiveness of sterilization, a
minimum sterilization time of 5 minutes is re-
quired.
Sterilization of the Infinity ID expiratory valve or in-
spiratory valve may gradually impair the operation
of RFID transmission. This may mean that
Infinity ID breathing circuit functions may not work
or may no longer work reliably. If the message In-
finity ID Breathing Circuit detected is not dis-
played when an Infinity ID breathing is connected,
use a different Infinity ID breathing circuit. If the
message is still not displayed, replace the
Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve or inspiratory
valve.
Reprocessing list
Applicable to non-infectious patients.
CAUTION
For infectious patients, all parts that come into
contact with breathing gas also have to be steril-
ized after disinfection and cleaning.
The list is merely intended as an approximate

guide. The instructions of the hospital´s hygiene of-
ficer shall prevail and must be observed by the us-
er!
Components which can Recommended Machine Manual Sterilization

be reprocessed reprocessing cleaning and Cleaning Disinfection
intervals disinfection
Ventilation unit Per patient No Outside Outside No
Babylog VN500
Trolley Per patient No Outside Outside No
Hinged arm1)
Universal holder
Humidifier holder Per patient No Outside Outside No
System cable
Compressed gas hoses
Breathing hoses Per patient/ Yes Possible Possible Yes
weekly
Y-piece
Water traps
Collection container
Expiratory valve Per patient/ Yes Possible Possible Yes
weekly2)
Diaphragm
Silencer
Collection container of the
water trap
Inspiratory unit If soiled3) Yes Possible Possible Yes
Diaphragm
Components which can Recommended Machine Manual Sterilization

be reprocessed reprocessing cleaning and Cleaning Disinfection
intervals disinfection
CO2 sensor Per patient No Outside Outside4) No
Reusable cuvette of the Per patient/ Yes5) Yes Yes Yes
CO2 sensor if soiled
Test filter for CO2 sensor If soiled No Yes4 Yes No
Housing of the ISO 15 Daily Yes Possible Possible Yes
Insert of the ISO 15 neo- Daily According to the corresponding Instructions for Use
natal flow sensor
Y-piece with integrated Daily According to the corresponding Instructions for Use
Breathing gas humidifier Per patient/ According to the corresponding Instructions for Use
weekly
Medication nebulizer According to the corresponding Instructions for Use
Parts for adapting Per patient/ Yes Possible Possible Yes
weekly
Bacterial filter According to the corresponding Instructions for Use
1) Observe the Instructions for Use for "Infinity Acute Care System Hinged Arm".
2) Nebulization may lead to increased deposits making it necessary to exchange the parts more often.
3) The inspiratory unit must only be reprocessed when patient gas has passed through the safety valve. For additional infor-
mation, see "Dismantling the inspiratory unit" on page 197.
4) Wipe disinfection, e.g., with 70 % ethanol. Avoid residues on the test filter. For additional information, see "Manual disin-
fection" on page 200.
5) Only detergent, and not clear rinsing agent, must be use for automatically cleaning the cuvette. Otherwise there is a danger
of cracks being formed.
Assembling parts
Assembling Infinity ID neonatal Inserting the expiratory valve into

expiratory valve Babylog VN500
Prerequisite: The flap on the front is pivoted up-
1 Make sure all parts of the expiratory valve are wards.
completely dry, otherwise this may impair prop-
er functioning. 1 Turn the locking ring (D) as far as possible to
the left.
2 Push the expiratory valve into the fitting.
B
D
A
072
2 Attach the silencer (B) to the expiratory valve.

3 Fit the diaphragm (A) onto the edge of the expi-
073
ratory valve housing.
3 Turn the locking ring (D) as far as it will go to the
right until it clicks audibly into place.
4 Check that it is properly secured by gently pull-
ing on the expiratory valve.
5 Close the flap.
C
040
4 Fit the collection container for the water

trap (C).
Assembling the inspiratory unit Inserting the inspiratory unit into

Babylog VN500
1 Make sure the inspiratory unit and diaphragm 1 Insert the inspiratory unit (E) into the recesses
are completely dry, otherwise this may impair of the fitting and push as far as it will go into the
proper functioning. fitting.
A
C
E
B
C
190
189
2 Insert the adapter (A) of the diaphragm into the 2 Turn the inspiratory unit in clockwise direction
opening of the fitting (B). The adapter must be until the lock clicks into place.
able to slightly move up and down in the open-
3 Check whether the inspiratory unit is properly
ing.
engaged.
3 Position the diaphragm in such a way that it is in
the recesses (C) of the fitting.
Assembling accessories
Assemble the medication nebulizer and breathing

gas humidifier in accordance with the correspond-
ing Instructions for Use.
z Connecting the medication nebulizer to the
breathing circuit, see page 94.
D
z Preparing the breathing gas humidifier,
see page 46.
197
4 Fit the diaphragm onto the edge of the fitting

(D).
Before reusing on patient
1 For information on assembling the scope of

equipment, see chapter "Preparation"
on page 37.
2 For information on readiness for operation, see
chapter "Getting Started" on page 57.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance intervals for Babylog VN500 . . 208
Safety inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Exchanging the ambient air filter . . . . . . . . . 210
Exchanging the diaphragm of the

expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Maintenance
Maintenance intervals for Babylog VN500
CAUTION
Disinfect and clean the device and its components
before all maintenance work, also before return-
ing device for repairs!
The following table provides an overview of the

maintenance intervals for Babylog VN500.
Ambient air filter (Babylog VN500) Clean or exchange after 4 weeks, see "Exchanging the
ambient air filter" on page 210.
Exchange after 1 year.
Dispose of with normal domestic waste.
Ambient air filter (PS500) Must be serviced in conjunction with annual inspections.
Gas supply unit GS500 Air filter of blower unit must be replaced annually by trained
service personnel.
Filter mat must be replaced annually by trained service
personnel.
Diaphragm of the expiratory valve Exchange after 1 year, see "Exchanging the diaphragm of
the expiratory valve" on page 210.
Dispose of with normal domestic waste.
Internal battery (Babylog VN500) Must be serviced in conjunction with annual inspections.
To be exchanged at the latest every 2 years by trained
service personnel.
Check capacity every year; have battery exchanged by
trained service personnel if necessary.
Internal batteries (PS500) Must be serviced in conjunction with annual inspections.
To be exchanged at the latest every 2 years by trained
service personnel.
Check capacity every year; have batteries replaced by
trained service personnel if necessary.
O2 filter (in the O2 gas inlet) To be exchanged every 6 years by trained service
personnel.
Air filter (in the Air gas inlet) To be exchanged every 2 years by trained service
personnel.
Device Inspection and Servicing Every year by trained service personnel.
Safety inspections Every year by trained service personnel. Scope see "Safety
inspections" on page 209.
Maintenance
Safety inspections
CAUTION – Perform a functional test of the airway pres-

sure measurement.
Perform the safety inspections in the specified in-
– Perform a functional test of the flow mea-
tervals. Otherwise this may impair correct func-
surement.
tioning of the device.
– Perform a functional test of the internal bat-
tery.
Scope – Perform a functional test of the internal bat-
teries for the power supply unit PS500.
1 Check the accompanying documents:
– Instructions for Use present. The safety inspections are no substitute for the
inspection and maintenance indicated by the
2 Check equipment for completeness when the manufacturer, including the preventive ex-
product is ready for operation according to the change of wearing parts.
Instructions for Use.
3 Check the device combination to make sure it is
in perfect condition:
– Labels complete and legible.
– No damage.
– Fuses which are accessible from the out-
side are in compliance with the specified
values.
4 Check electrical safety
– in accordance with IEC 62353 or
DIN VDE 0751, Part 1
5 Check safety devices:
– Correct functioning of the emergency expi-
ratory valve: Pressure rise 1.9 to 4.4 mbar
(1.9 to 4.4 cmH2O) at a flow of 4.5 to
5.5 L/min.
– Correct functioning of the non-return valve
in the expiratory valve.
– Correct functioning of the emergency
breathing valve: Maximum pressure drop of
6 mbar (6 cmH2O) at a suction flow of 60 to
65 L/min.
– Check the correct functioning of the alarm
generator.
– Check the correct functioning of the non-re-
turn valves in the gas inlet for O2 and Air.
6 Check for correct functioning according to the
Instructions for Use:
– Perform a device check and a breathing cir-
cuit check according to the Instructions for
Use.
Maintenance
Exchanging the ambient air filter
CAUTION 1 Unscrew the screw (A) on the cover of the

ambient air filter.
Replace the ambient air filter at regular intervals.
Otherwise operation of the device may be im- 2 Open the cover (B).
paired.
3 Remove the filter from the mount.
Clean or exchange if soiled or after 4 weeks at the 4 Fit a new filter or clean the old filter in warm
latest. Exchange after 1 year at the latest. soapy water and dry thoroughly.
5 Insert the filter into the mount without creasing.
6 Close the cover (B) and retighten the screw (A).
7 Dispose of used filter with domestic waste.
A
B
035
Exchanging the diaphragm of the expiratory valve
Prerequisite: The expiratory valve has been re- 1 Remove the diaphragm (A).
moved, see "Removing the expiratory valve"
2 Fit the new diaphragm onto the edge of the ex-
on page 197.
piratory valve housing. Make sure that the dia-
phragm is fitted properly.
3 Dispose of used diaphragm with domestic
waste.
4 Fit the expiratory valve, see "Insert the
expiratory valve into the ventilation unit"
on page 45.
A
187
Disposal
Disposal
Safety information on disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposing of packaging material . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposal of batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposal of a neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . 213
Disposal of the medical device . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Disposal
Safety information on disposal
CAUTION at municipal collection points for waste electrical

and electronic equipment. Dräger Medical has au-
The device and its components must be disinfect-
thorized a company to collect and dispose of this
ed and cleaned before disposal!
device. To initiate take-back or for further informa-
tion, visit us on the Internet at www.draeger.com
For countries subject to EU Directive and go to the DrägerService area where you will
2002/96/EC: find a link to "WEEE". If you have no access to our
website, contact your local Dräger Medical Organi-
This device is subject to EU Directive 2002/96/EC zation.
(WEEE). In order to comply with its registration ac-
cording to this directive, it may not be disposed of
Disposing of packaging material
Dispose of the packaging material of the device and

the accessories listed in the accessories list as per
the applicable legal regulations.
Disposal of batteries
WARNING
Risk of explosion! Do not throw in fire.
Risk of corrosion! Do not open using force.
The medical device contains batteries with toxic

substances.
In the Federal Republic of Germany: The user is
obliged by the ordinance on the return and disposal
of used batteries to return batteries which contain
toxic substances either to the manufacturer/sales
outlet or to a collection center operated by public
waste disposal corporations. The battery installed
in the device must therefore be removed by
DrägerService before the apparatus can be dis-
posed of. In countries other than the Federal Re-
public of Germany, the respective national regula-
tions must be observed.
Disposal
Disposal of a neonatal flow sensor
The flow sensor must be disposed of as infectious

waste. Low-emission combustion at over 800 °C
(1472 °F).
Disposal of the medical device
When disposing of the medical device:

z Consult the relevant waste disposal company
for appropriate disposal.
Note the applicable statutory regulations.
Technical Data
Technical Data
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Displayed measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Displayed calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Device ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Automatic alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Technical Data
Ambient conditions
During operation
Temperature 10 to 40 °C (50 to 104 °F)
Atmospheric pressure 700 to 1060 hPa (10.2 to 15.3 psi)
Rel. humidity 10 to 90 %, without condensation
During storage and transportation
Temperature –20 to 60 °C (–4 to 140 °F) without PS500
–15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F) with PS500
Atmospheric pressure 500 to 1060 hPa (7.3 to 15.3 psi)
Relative humidity 5 to 95 %, without condensation
Depending on the accessories used, more
stringent ambient conditions can apply. Obser-
ve the corresponding Instructions for Use.
Set values
The required parameters can be adjusted with the

therapy controls of Babylog VN500 without any
loss of accuracy. Only closed loop therapy controls
(e.g. VT or O2 concentration) comprise the accura-
cy of the corresponding measurement technique.
Respiratory rate RR 0.5 to 150/min
Inspiratory time Ti 0.1 to 3 s
Maximum inspiratory time for flow cycled breaths
Timax
Pediatric patients 0.1 to 4 s
Neonates 0.1 to 1.5 s
Tidal volume VT
Pediatric patients 0.02 to 0.3 L under BTPS ±5 % of set value, or
±10 mL, whichever is greater
Neonates 0.002 to 0.1 L under BTPS ±8 % of set value, or
±0.5 mL, whichever is greater
Tidal volume for pressure support VT
Technical Data
Set values (cont’d)
Activation state of Apnea Ventilation on, off

Activation state of the function Automatic return on, off
from Apnea Ventilation
Tidal volume during Apnea Ventilation VTapn
Respiratory rate during Apnea Ventilation RRapn 2 to 150/min
Inspiratory flow Flow
Pediatric patients 2 to 30 L/min
Neonates 2 to 30 L/min
Inspiratory pressure Pinsp 1 to 80 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Inspiratory pressure limit Pmax 2 to 100 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
O2 concentration FiO2 21 to 100 Vol%
Positive end-expiratory pressure PEEP or intermit- 0 to 35 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
tent PEEP ΔintPEEP
Trigger sensitivity Flow trigger 0.2 to 5 L/min
Pressure support Psupp 0 to 80 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Rise time for pressure support Slope
Pediatric patients 0 to 2 s
Neonates 0 to 1.5 s
Airway Pressure Release Ventilation APRV
Inspiratory time Thigh 0.1 to 30 s
Expiratory time Tlow 0.05 to 30 s
Maximum time of low pressure level in 0.05 to 30 s
APRV/PEF Tlow max
Inspiratory pressure Phigh 1 to 80 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Expiratory pressure Plow 0 to 35 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Termination criterion (expiratory flow) 1 to 80 %
Exp. term.
Automatic Tube Compensation ATC
Inner tube diameter Tube Ø
Endotracheal tube ET
Pediatric patients 2 to 8 mm (0.08 to 0.31 inch)
Neonates 2 to 5 mm (0.08 to 0.2 inch)
Technical Data
Tracheostomy tube Trach.

Pediatric patients 2.5 to 8 mm (0.1 to 0.31 inch)
Degree of tube compensation Compens. 0 to 100 %
Activation state of ATC during mandatory inspi- on / off
rations Inspiratory compensation
Activation state of ATC during expiratory pha- on / off
ses Expiratory compensation
Proportional Pressure Support PPS
Flow Assist Flow Assist
Pediatric patients 0 to 100 mbar/L/s (or hPa/L/s or cmH2O/L/s)
Neonates 0 to 300 mbar/L/s (or hPa/L/s or cmH2O/L/s)
Volume Assist Vol. Assist
Pediatric patients 0 to 1000 mbar/L (or hPa/L or cmH2O/L)
corresponds to compliance compensation 10000 to 1 mL/mbar (or mL/hPa or mL/cmH2O)
Neonates 0 to 4000 mbar/L (or hPa/L or cmH2O/L)
corresponds to compliance compensation 10000 to 0.5 mL/mbar (or mL/hPa or mL/cmH2O)
O2 Therapy
Continuous Flow Flow (BTPS) 2 to 50 L/min
O2 concentration FiO2 21 to 100 Vol%
High Frequency Oscillation HFO
Mean airway pressure in HFO MAPhf 5 to 50 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Frequency of oscillation in HFO fhf 5 to 20 Hz
I to E in HFO I:Ehf 1:1 to 1:3
Pressure amplitude in HFO Ampl hf 1 to 90 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Tidal volume in HFO VThf 0.2 to 40 mL
Sigh pressure in HFO Psigh 5 to 80 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Respiratory rate of sigh in HFO RRsigh 1 to 30/min
Sigh pressure rise time Slopesigh
Pediatric patients 0 to 2 s
Neonates 0 to 1.5 s
Sigh inspiratory time in HFO Tisigh 0.1 to 3 s
Leakage compensation on / off
on = full compensation active
off = only trigger compensation active
Technical Data
Maneuver settings
Sigh pressure ΔintPEEP 0 to 20 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Time interval between sighs Interval sigh 20 s to 180 min
Number of cycles for a sigh Cycles sigh 1 to 20 exhalations
Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver
Factor for neonates 1 to 2
Factor for pediatric patients 1 to 2
Performance characteristics
Control principle time-cycled, volume-constant, pressure-controlled

Intermittent PEEP duration 1 to 20 expiratory cycles
Medication nebulization for 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes
Endotracheal suction
Disconnection detection automatic
Reconnection detection automatic
Initial oxygen enrichment max. 3 minutes
Active suction phase max. 2 minutes
Final oxygen enrichment max. 2 minutes
Supply system for spontaneous breathing and adaptive CPAP system with high initial flow
Psupp
Inspiratory flow (BTPS) max. 30 L/min
Base flow, neonates 6 L/min
Base flow, pediatric patients 3 L/min
Resistance is specified for the breathing circuit, i.e.
between the safety valve, the expiratory valve, and
the Y-piece. Resistances account for humidifiers
as applicable but do not account for additional ac-
cessories like bacterial filters, HME, neonatal flow
sensor or CO2 cuvettes. Resistances for these ac-
cessories are given in the list of accessories.
Inspiratory resistance
During operation with Fisher & Paykel humidi-
fier
Pediatric patients, maximum value <6 mbar at 15 L/min
<6 hPa at 15 L/min
<6 cmH2O at 15 L/min
Technical Data
Performance characteristics (cont’d)
Neonates, maximum value <1.2 mbar at 5 L/min

<1.2 hPa at 5 L/min
<1.2 cmH2O at 5 L/min
Following device failure with Fisher & Paykel
humidifier
Pediatric patients, maximum value <13 mbar at 30 L/min
<13 hPa at 30 L/min
<13 cmH2O at 30 L/min
<1.5 hPa at 5 L/min
Expiratory resistance
During operation
Pediatric patients, maximum value <4.5 mbar at 15 L/min
<4.5 hPa at 15 L/min
<1.2 hPa at 5 L/min
Following device failure
Pediatric patients, maximum value <5.0 mbar at 30 L/min
<5.0 hPa at 30 L/min
<1.0 hPa at 5 L/min
Compliance of device incl. breathing circuit
Neonates, maximum value <1.3 mL/mbar
<1.3 mL/hPa
<1.3 mL/cmH2O
Dead space volume
with CO2 cuvette <15 mL
without CO2 cuvette <11 mL
Additional functions
Safety valve Opens if medical compressed air supply fails (sup-
ply gas flow is not sufficient to provide the breathing
flow required), enables spontaneous breathing with
ambient air
Technical Data
Displayed measured values
Accuracy does only apply for the measurement

range specified.
Airway pressure measurement
Plateau pressure Pplat
Positive end-expiratory pressure PEEP
Peak Inspiratory Pressure PIP
Mean airway pressure Pmean
Minimal airway pressure Pmin
Lower pressure level in APRV Plow
End-inspriatory pressure for mandatory bre- EIP
aths
Upper pressure level in APRV Phigh
Pressure amplitude (peak-to-peak) in HFO ΔPhf
Intrinsic PEEP obtained during PEEPi maneu- PEEPi
ver
Range –60 to 120 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Accuracy ±6 % of measured value, or ±0.5 mbar (or hPa or
cmH2O), whichever is greater
T0...90 (for Pmean) 33 s for intubated patients and 20 s with NIV
O2 measurement (inspiratory side)
Inspiratory O2 concentration (in dry air) FiO2
Range 18 to 100 Vol%
Accuracy ±3 Vol% at 20 °C (68 °F)
Drift of measurement accuracy 0.2 Vol% per month (the measured values are ba-
rometrically pressure compensated)
T0...90 <30 s
Warm-up time max. 3 minutes, typ. 1 minute
Flow measurement (proximal)
Minute volume measurement
Total minute volume MV
Mandatory minute volume MVmand
Spontaneous minute volume MVspon
Range 0 to 99 L/min
BTPS
Technical Data
Displayed measured values (cont’d)
Accuracy measured with neonatal flowsensor:

±8 % of measured value, if measured volume is
greater than 6 mL, calibration during device check
(at 1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O), gas with 50 % rel.
humidity, 23 °C), no leakage and using a Dräger
Y-piece, no HFO
T0...90 33 s
Tidal volume measurement
Tidal volume VT
Inspiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTimand
compensated) of mandatory breaths
Expiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTemand
compensated) of mandatory breaths
Inspiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTispon
compensated) of spontaneous breaths
Respiratory rate measurement
Respiratory rate RR
Mandatory respiratory rate RRmand
Spontaneous respiratory rate RRspon
Range 0 to 300/min
Accuracy ±1/min for respiratory rates ≥2/min and
±2/min for respiratory rates <2/min
T0...90 33 s
Effective inspiratory time during spontaneous 0 to 20 s
breathing Tispon
Effective expiratory time, only if additional set- 0 to 20 s
ting AutoRelease is active Tlow max
Inspiratory time to expiratory time ratio for 1:1200 to 1200:1
mandatory ventilation I:E
Inspiratory time to expiratory time ratio for 1:1200 to 1200:1
spontaneous breathing I:Espon
Leakage in % 0 to 100 %
CO2 measurement in main flow
Interference with gases and vapors
Freon R21 100 Vol% 0.07 Vol%
Freon R134a 100 Vol% 0.19 Vol%
Ethanol 4 ‰ (concentration in blood) 0.00 Vol%
Isopropanol 1 Vol% 0.00 Vol%
Technical Data
Displayed measured values (cont’d)
Acetone 1 ‰ (concentration in blood) 0.00 Vol%

Methane 3 Vol% <0.02 Vol%
End-expiratory CO2 concentration etCO2
Range 0 to 100 mmHg (or 0 to 13.2 Vol% or 0 to 13.3 kPa)
Accuracy ±2.0 mmHg in the range of 0 to 40 mmHg, ±5 % of
the measured value in the range of 41 to
100 mmHg
±0.27 kPa in the range of 0 to 5.33 kPa, ±5 % of the
measured value in the range of 5.34 bis 13.3 kPa
±0.26 Vol% in the range of 0 to 5.26 Vol%, ± 5 % of
the measured value in the range of 5.27 to
13.2 Vol%.
Drift of measurement accuracy <0.02 Vol% (at 5.26 Vol%)
<0.2 mmHg (at 40 mmHg)
<0.02 kPa (at 5.33 kPa)
over 6 h
(the measured values are barometrically pressure
compensated)
T10...90 ≤30 ms
Total response time ≤250 ms
Warm-up time, typical 3 min
Displayed calculated values
Leakage minute volume MVleak

Range 0 to 99 L/min
BTPS
Accuracy ±8 % of measured value
T0...90 33 s for intubated patients and 20 s with NIV
Spontaneous portion of minute volume in percent 0 to 100 %
%MVspon
Curve displays
Airway pressure Paw (t) –30 to 100 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Flow (t) –40 to 40 L/min
Volume V (t) 2 to 300 mL
CO2 (t) 0 to 100 mmHg (or 0 to 15 Vol% or 0 to 13 kPa)
Technical Data
Monitoring
Alarm sound pressure level L(A) at operators posi-

tion:
Operators position: at front of device at a distance
off 1 m (39 inch) and a height of 1.5 m (59 inch).
Free field measurement in accordance with
ISO 3744
Alarm tone sequence IEC/CEI
Range for high-priority alarms about 54 dB(A) to 75 dB(A)
Range for medium-priority alarms about 47 dB(A) to 72 dB(A)
Range for low-priority alarms about 42 dB(A) to 69 dB(A)
Incrementation adjustable in 10 increments
Alarm tone sequence Dräger ventilation
Range for high-priority alarms about 56 dB(A) to 81 dB(A)
Range for medium-priority alarms about 54 dB(A) to 79 dB(A)
Range for low-priority alarms about 49 dB(A) to 77 dB(A)
Incrementation adjustable in 10 increments
Alarm sound pressure level for mains power about 70 dB(A) to 75 dB(A)
failure and auxiliary alarms
Expiratory minute volume MV
Upper alarm limit alarm if the upper alarm limit has been exceeded
Setting range in invasive ventilation 0.03 to 41 L/min
Setting range in non-invasive ventilation 0.03 to 60 L/min
Lower alarm limit alarm if the value has fallen below the lower alarm limit
Setting range 0.02 to 40 L/min, Off (NIV)
Alarm suppression 2 min after leaving standby
during and 2 min after suction maneuver
2 min after switching on flow monitoring
Airway pressure Paw
Setting range 7 to 105 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Maximum airway pressure 120 mbar (oder hPa or cmH2O)
Insp. O2 concentration FiO2
Upper alarm limit alarm if the upper alarm limit is exceeded for at least
30 seconds
Lower alarm limit alarm if the value falls below the lower alarm limit for at
least 30 seconds
Technical Data
Monitoring (cont’d)
Range both alarm limits are automatically assigned to the

set value: below 60 Vol% at ±4 Vol%, from 60 Vol%
at ±6 Vol%
(Lower alarm limit is 18 Vol% at 21 Vol%)
End-expiratory CO2 concentration etCO2
Setting range 1 to 98 mmHg (or 0 to 15 Vol% or 0 to 13 kPa)
Lower alarm limit alarm if the value has fallen below the lower alarm limit
Setting range 0 to 97 mmHg (or 0 to 15 Vol% or 0 to 13 kPa)
Respiratory rate RR
Upper alarm limit alarm if the respiratory rate (mandatory and spontaneous
breaths) has been exceeded
Setting range 5 to 200/min, Off
Volume monitoring VT
Lower alarm limit alarm if the set tidal volume has not been supplied
Setting range 90 % of VTset (only modes with VG)
Alarm suppression
Pediatric patients during the first five consecutive
breaths where the applied inspiratory tidal volume
has fallen below the lower alarm limit
Neonates during the first eight consecutive
breaths where the applied inspiratory tidal volume
has fallen below the lower alarm limit
Apnea alarm time Tapn
Alarm if no breathing activity is detected
Setting range 5 to 60 seconds, Off
Disconnect alarm delay time Tdisconnect
Setting range 0 to 60 seconds
Technical Data
Operating data
Mains supply
Mains power connection without PS500 100 V to 240 V
50/60 Hz
Mains power connection with PS500 100 V to 127 V 50/60 Hz
220 V to 240 V 50 Hz
220 V to 240 V 60 Hz with extra potential equaliza-
tion
Current consumption
at 230 V max. 1.1 A Ventilation Unit with Medical Cockpit
max. 1.6 A with GS500
max. 2.3 A with PS500
max. 2.8 A with GS500 and PS500
at 100 V max. 2.5 A Ventilation Unit with Medical Cockpit
max. 3.7 A with GS500
max. 5.3 A with PS500
max. 6.5 A with GS500 and PS500
Power consumption
maximum 250 W Ventilation Unit with Medical Cockpit
370 W with GS500
525 W with PS500
645 W with GS500 and PS500
in operation, without charging of internal approx. 100 W Ventilation Unit with Medical Cock-
battery pit
approx. 180 W with GS500
approx. 130 W with PS500
approx. 210 W with GS500 and PS500
Device fuses
Range 100 V to 240 V F6.3H 250V IEC 60127-2/V (2 pcs.) Ventilation Unit
T1 250V 1.6A (2 pcs.) GS500
F10H 250V IEC 60127-2/V (2 pcs.) PS500
Protection class
Ventilation Unit Babylog VN500 Class I
Medical Cockpit Infinity C500
Gas Supply Unit GS500
Power Supply Unit PS500
CO2 sensor (sensor connected) Type BF
Proximal flow sensor (sensor connected) Type BF
Technical Data
Operating data (cont’d)
Internal battery Ventilation Unit

Type NiMH battery,
sealed, maintenance-free
Fuse F15A 80V UL248
Capacity 2.5 Ah
Voltage 24 V
Current 0 to 15 A
Time bridged if mains supply is not available
with new and fully charged internal battery min. 30 minutes (typically 40 minutes)
Charging
Charging time (to charge battery complete- min. 4 hours
ly)
Charging power max. 50 W
Internal battery PS500
Type VRLA batteries,
maintenance-free
(VRLA = Valve Regulated Lead Acid)
Capacity 14 Ah to 16 Ah
Voltage 36 V (3 x 12 V)
Time bridged if mains supply is not available.
with new and fully charged internal battery 100 minutes (AC load 155 W / 175 VA)
Charging
Charging time (to charge battery min. 8 hours
completely)
Charging power max. 180 W
Gas supply
O2 pressure 2.7 to 6.0 bar (or 270 to 600 kPa or 39 to 87 psi)
O2 peak input flow 130 L/min (at 2.8 bar (40.6 psi) input pressure)
180 L/min (at 4.0 bar (58.0 psi) input pressure)
O2 connection depending on configuration: DIN, NIST, DISS, Air
Liquide
Air pressure 2.7 to 6.0 bar (or 270 to 600 kPa or 39 to 87 psi)
Air peak input flow 130 L/min (at 2.8 bar (40.6 psi) input pressure)
180 L/min (at 4.0 bar (58.0 psi) input pressure)
Air connection depending on configuration: DIN, NIST, DISS, Air
Liquide
Dew point 5 °C (41 °F) below ambient temperature
Technical Data
Oil concentration <0.1 mg/m3

Particle size Dust-free air (filtered with pore size <1 µm)
Gas consumption
Consumption for ventilation Depends on ventilation settings
Consumption for pneumatic medication Medical air or O2 max. 2.1 bar (or 210 kPa or
nebulizer 30.5 psi), max. 11 L/min
Automatic gas switch-over if one gas fails, the device switches to the other
gas.
Sound pressure level of device during typical ven-
tilation (measured at operator's position in a free-
field in accordance with ISO 3744 at a distance of
1 m (39 inch) and at a height of 1.5 m (59 inch))
Mean sound pressure level Leq(A) ≤45 dB(A)
≤50 dB(A) with GS500
Mean sound pressure level Leq(A) ≤45 dB (A) for conventional ventilation
≤50 dB (A) for HFO
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Babylog VN500 and Infinity C500 420 mm x 685 mm x 410 mm
(16.5 inch x 27.0 inch x 16.1 inch)
Babylog VN500 and Infinity C500 on trolley 577 mm x 1400 mm x 677 mm
(22.7 inch x 55.1 inch x 26.7 inch)
Weight
Babylog VN500 and Infinity C500 approx. 25 kg (55.1 lbs)
Babylog VN500 and Infinity C500
on trolley approx. 59 kg (130 lbs)
PS500 approx. 25 kg (55.1 lbs)
GS500 approx. 10 kg (22 lbs)
Maximum load
Trolley 100 kg (220.5 lbs)
Universal holder with standard rail 10 kg (22.1 lbs)
Humidifier holder 8416325 10 kg (22.1 lbs)
Humidifier holder G93111 8 kg (17.6 lbs)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) (conforming tested in according to EN 60601-1-2
to European Directive 89/336/EEC)
Classification as per EC Directive 93/42/EEC An- II b
nex IX
UMDNS code Universal Medical Device Nomenc- 17-429
lature System - Nomenclature for medical devices
Technical Data
Materials used
Breathing hose (reusable) Silicone rubber (milky, transparent)
Water trap (reusable) Polysulphone (gray, transparent)
Y-piece (reusable) Polysulphone (yellow, transparent)
Expiratory valve (housing, closure, nozzle Polyamide (white, blue)
Inspiratory unit, nozzle Polyamide (white, blue)
Diaphragm Silicone rubber and nickel (whitish and gray)
Reusable CO2 cuvette Polysulphone with sapphire windows (yellow, trans-
parent: adult cuvette; violet, transparent: pediatric
cuvette)
Disposable CO2 cuvette Styrene-butadiene copolymer SBC (transparent)
CO2 sensor and CO2 cable Polyurethane (gray/gray)
For Nurse call
Connection via cable 8417370 only
Floating DC contact
Input voltage 24 V DC max.
Input current 1 A DC max.
Switching capacity 15 W max.
Cable assignment 8417370 in alarm-free
situation 1
3
Cable 1 (normally open): white
Cable 2 (common): brown
Cable 3 (normally closed): green
Device ports
Outputs
V1 System cable
V2, V3 not used
V4 Nurse call
V5 Neonatal flow sensor
V6 not used
V7 CO2 sensor
Technical Data
Device ports (cont’d)
V8 not used
V9 GS500
MEDIBUS protocol
Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud
(19200 and 38400 baud are required for transmit-
ting high-speed data, e.g. for the flow waveform)
Data bits 8
Parity even, odd, no
Stop bits 1 or 2
Pin assignment of COM1, COM2 and COM3
Pin 1 DCD
Pin 2 RXD
Pin 3 TXD
Pin 4 DTR
Pin 5 GND
Pin 6 DSR
Pin 7, 8 RTS/CTS
Pin 9 RI
Housing SHLD
Electrical isolation
V1 The port is not electrically isolated from the device
electronics.
V2, V3 not used
electronics.
V5 The port is electrically isolated from the device
electronics (Type BF). The test voltage for electrical
isolation is 1500 V.
V6 not used
electronics.
V8 not used
V9 The port is electrically isolated from the device
electronics. The test voltage for electrical isolation
is 500 V.
Technical Data
Automatic alarm limits
The following tables describe the alarm limits which

cannot be set by the user.
Alarm message Description/detection

Airway pressure high The airway pressure is monitored to detect whether the upper alarm
limit is exceeded.
If the alarm limit indicating a too high airway pressure is linked to ven-
tilation therapy controls, this limit is set 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) above the
highest pressure which is regularly applied during ventilation according
to the user settings. This connection is switched off by default.
VT low Under Volume Guarantee, 90 % of the set VT is not reached during
eight consecutive breaths.
Breathing hose kinked (O2 A too high pressure during an O2 Therapy is monitored. The alarm limit
Therapy) is set at 30 mbar (30 cmH2O).
Airway pressure negative Situations in which the pressure becomes negative are monitored. The
alarm limit is set at –10 mbar (–10 cmH2O).
PEEP high / Plow high A too high PEEP or Plow value during ventilation is monitored. The
alarm limit is 4 mbar (4 cmH2O) above the set value for the PEEP or
Plow level.
For a set value ≤8 mbar (≤8 cmH2O), the alarm limit is determined de-
pending on the measured expiratory Flow. However, in this case, the
alarm limit is never greater than 12 mbar (12 cmH2O).
To avoid false alarms, the pressure is not monitored to detect whether
the lower level has been reached if APRV and the Tlow value were set
to less than 1 s. In this setting, the set Plow can often not be reached
depending on the situation of the patient and the technical conditions.
To avoid false alarms, the pressure is not monitored to detect whether
the lower level has been reached if APRV and AutoRelease were set.
PEEP high / Plow high The alarm is not reliably detected under the following conditions:
– The tube cuff has a large Leakage.
– The breathing circuit used has a high resistance, e.g., heated pedi-
atric breathing circuit.
As a result, a blocked expiratory bacterial filter cannot be detected.
PEEP low / Plow low A too low PEEP or Plow value during ventilation is monitored. The
alarm limit depends on the set value of the PEEP or Plow level. The
alarm limit is smaller than the set value by 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) in each
case.
Technical Data

Pressure limited (ATC/PPS) The upper pressure limit is monitored to detect whether it is reached
when using ATC or PPS.
If the Paw high alarm limit can be adjusted, the alarm limit is derived
from this value and is in the range of Paw high –5 mbar (–5 cmH2O) to
Paw high –1 mbar (–1 cmH2O), depending how close the Paw high
value is to the ventilation which is currently being applied.
If the Paw high alarm limit is linked (Pmax/Paw high autoset), the
pressure limit corresponds to the value of the therapy control Pmax.
Airway pressure low A too low airway pressure is monitored by checking whether the inte-
gral of the pressure measured value deviations from the lower pressure
level exceeds 22.5 mbar x s (22.5 cmH2O x s).
Volume monitoring

Volume measurement inac- The quality of the volume calculation is monitored. Due to leakage com-
curate pensation, the device is able to calculate a minute volume from the
measured expiratory minute volume which was applied to the patient.
The portion of the minute volume applied to the patient, which may be
considered as inaccurate due to the current ventilation situation, is set
in proportion to the calculated patient minute volume. If this ratio ex-
ceeds the value of 50 % for at least 30 seconds, an alarm is generated.
VT not reached, leakage Volume-guaranteed breaths are monitored to detect whether the set
volume is reached. The alarm limit is set at 90 % of the set point VT.
VThf not reached
Pressure limited During ventilation with Volume Guarantee, breaths are monitored to de-
tect whether the volume to be applied is reached if the applied ventila-
tion pressure cannot automatically be increased any further. The alarm
limit is set at the set value for the volume.
Technical Data
Monitoring of the breathing circuit and the pa-

tient connection

Disconnection? Disconnection is monitored by checking that the mandatory breaths
reach a minimum pressure level. The alarm limit is derived from the set
points for ventilation.
During pressure-controlled ventilation, the alarm is triggered when the
airway pressure is lower than the lower pressure level plus 50 % of the
pressure difference between the upper and lower pressure levels.
During pressure-supported ventilation, the alarm is triggered when the
airway pressure is lower than the lower pressure level plus 30 % of the
pressure difference between the upper and lower pressure levels.
During ventilation with Volume Guarantee and volume support, the limit
is 50 % of the difference between the set points for the upper and lower
pressure level larger than the set point for the lower pressure level.
Disconnection is monitored by checking whether the volume delivered
in a breath exceeds a value which is derived from the inspiratory minute
volume. The alarm limit is set at inspiratory MV x 30 s.
Leakage Leakages are monitored in the patient category Ped. pat.. The alarm
limit is set at 55 % of relative Leakage. Leakages during NIV are not
monitored.
Airway obstructed? Obstructions in the breathing circuit are monitored by observing the
Flow delivered to the patient during a defined period.
Technical Data
FiO2 monitoring

FiO2 high A too high O2 concentration of the applied gas is monitored.
The alarm limit is 4 Vol% above the set point if this is less than or equal
to 60 Vol%.
The alarm limit is 6 Vol% above the set point if this is greater than
60 Vol%.
FiO2 low A too low O2 concentration of the applied gas is monitored.
For a FiO2 concentration of 21 Vol% the alarm limit is 18 Vol%.
The alarm limit is 4 Vol% below the set point if this is greater than
21 Vol% and less than or equal to 60 Vol%.
The alarm limit is 6 Vol% below the set point if this is greater than
60 Vol%.
CO2 monitoring

CO2 sensor? The correct functioning of the CO2 sensor is monitored. An alarm is im-
mediately generated in the event of a technical defect or if a sensor is
not connected.
An alarm is generated after 60 s if the sensor is removed from the cu-
vette or the sensor does not detect any breathing movements.
Description
Description
Description of the ventilation modes . . . . . . 236 Literature references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

PC-CMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
PC-SIMV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
PC-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
PC-PSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
PC-MMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
PC-HFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
PC-APRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
SPN-CPAP/PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
SPN-CPAP/VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
SPN-PPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Additional settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . 249

Apnea Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Flow trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Inspiratory termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Sigh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
HFO-Sigh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Volume Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Volume Guarantee (HFO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
ATC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
AutoRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Special procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Medication nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
C20/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Smart Pulmonary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Description of the therapy types. . . . . . . . . . 264

O2 Therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Automatic leakage compensation . . . . . . . . 265
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Measurement principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Airway pressure measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Pneumatic functional description. . . . . . . . . 268
Main menu bar structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Factory-set screen views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Description
Description of the ventilation modes
PC-CMV
Pressure Control-Continuous Mandatory

Ventilation
Continuous pressure-controlled ventilation allowing
spontaneous breathing (open system) during the
entire respiratory cycle
Paw fast slow

pressure rise pressure rise
Pinsp
PEEP
t
Ti
1
RR
Flow
t
without spontaneous with spontaneous breathing
breathing
200
Pressure-controlled ventilation
The upper pressure level is determined by Pinsp.
The duration of the mandatory breaths is deter-
mined by Ti. As in all pressure-controlled ventilation
modes, the tidal volume supplied depends on the
difference in pressure "Pinsp – PEEP", the lung
mechanics (resistance and compliance), and the
patient's respiratory drive. The pressure rise from
the lower pressure level PEEP to the upper pres-
sure level Pinsp is determined by the Slope or In-
sp. flow setting. The start setting can be configured
on the page System setup > Ventilation > Start
settings > Pressures, O2, I:E.
The mandatory breaths are time-cycled and are not
triggered by the patient. The number of mandatory
breaths is determined by the respiratory rate RR.
Description
PC-SIMV
Pressure Control-Synchronized Intermittent

Mandatory Ventilation
Intermittent, triggered, pressure-controlled ventila-
tion allowing spontaneous breathing (open system)
during the entire respiratory cycle
Paw fast Pressure support PS

slow
pressure rise pressure rise fast slow
Pinsp pressure rise pressure rise
PEEP
t
Ti Trigger window for insp.
1 synchronization
RR
Flow

breathing
201
Pressure-controlled ventilation A mandatory breath can only be triggered within
a "trigger window" by the flow trigger in synchrony
with the patient's spontaneous inspiratory effort.
This prevents the mandatory breath being applied
during expiration.
difference in pressure "Pinsp – PEEP", the lung The trigger window is 1.5 seconds long. For expira-
mechanics (resistance and compliance) and the tory times shorter than 1.5 seconds, the trigger win-
patient's respiratory drive. The pressure rise from dow covers the entire expiratory time minus a re-
the lower pressure level PEEP to the upper pres- fractory period for the previous expiration.
The synchronization of the mandatory breath re-
duces the expiratory time. Babylog VN500 pro-
longs the subsequent spontaneous breathing time
by the missing time. This prevents an increase of
the mandatory respiratory rate.
Synchronization
The number of mandatory breaths is determined by
The mandatory breaths can be triggered by the pa- the respiratory rate RR.
tient's inspiratory effort on PEEP level. By setting
the trigger level, the mandatory breaths can be syn-
chronized with the patient's inspiratory effort.
Description
Pressure support
During spontaneous breathing on PEEP level, the
patient can be supported with PS. Every inspiratory
effort by the patient on PEEP level that meets the
trigger criteria triggers a pressure-supported
breath. By setting the trigger level, the patient's in-
spiratory efforts are synchronized. The time, num-
ber, and duration of pressure-supported breaths is
determined by the patient's spontaneous breathing.
As in all pressure-controlled ventilation modes, the
tidal volume supplied depends on the difference in
pressure "Psupp – PEEP", the lung mechanics (re-
sistance and compliance) and the patient's respira-
tory drive. The pressure rise from the lower pres-
sure level PEEP to the upper pressure level Psupp
is determined by the Slope or Insp. flow setting.
The start setting can be configured on the page
System setup > Ventilation > Start settings >
Pressures, O2, I:E.
The pressure support is terminated as soon as the
inspiratory flow falls below 15 % of the maximum
inspiratory flow.
The pressure support is also terminated as soon as
the duration of the support has reached the maxi-
mum inspiratory time. For intubated patients, the
maximum inspiratory time in the Ped. pat. patient
category is limited to 1.5 seconds. In the Neo. pa-
tient category, the maximum inspiratory time is lim-
ited to 130 % of Ti, maximum of 1.5 seconds.
Description
PC-AC
Pressure Control-Assist Control

Assist-controlled, pressure-controlled ventilation
allowing spontaneous breathing during the entire
respiratory cycle and back-up respiratory rate
Paw
fast slow
Pinsp
PEEP
t
Ti Trigger window for
1 inspiratory synchronization
RR
Flow

breathing
202
Pressure-controlled ventilation previous expiration. The expiratory time is deter-
mined by the respiratory rate RR and the inspirato-
ry time Ti. A non-synchronized mandatory breath is
triggered at the latest at the end of the expiratory
time (backup respiratory rate).
difference in pressure "Pinsp – PEEP", the lung The minimal number of mandatory breaths is deter-
mechanics (resistance and compliance) and the mined by the respiratory rate RR.
patient's respiratory drive. The pressure rise from
the lower pressure level PEEP to the upper pres-
Assisted-controlled ventilation
Every inspiratory effort of the patient on PEEP level
triggers a synchronized mandatory breath. Thus,
the time and number of mandatory breaths are de-
termined by the patient. The trigger window covers
the expiratory time minus a refractory period for the
Description
PC-PSV
Pressure Control-Pressure Support Ventilation

Pressure-controlled ventilation with guaranteed
minimum respiratory rate (back-up respiratory rate)
Paw Spontaneous breathing

with pressure support PS
fast slow
PEEP
t
Flow
Inspiratory termination criterion
310
Pressure support start setting can be configured on the page System
setup > Ventilation > Start settings > Pressures,
O2, I:E.
patient can be supported with PS. The level of pres-
sure support is determined by Pinsp. Every inspira- The pressure support is terminated as soon as the
tory effort by the patient on PEEP level that meets inspiratory flow falls below 15 % of the maximum
the trigger criteria triggers a pressure-supported inspiratory flow, see "Inspiratory termination"
breath. By setting the trigger level, the patient's in- on page 252.
If the patient’s respiratory rate is less than the the
set back-up respiratory rate RR or there is no
category is limited to 1.5 seconds. For the Neo. pa-
spontaneous breathing present, the system admin-
tient category, the maximum inspiratory time can be
isters time-cycled pressure-supported breaths with
set with Timax to a maximum of 1.5 seconds.
the respiratory rate RR.
In the Neo. patient category, this mode is not avail-
able with non-invasive ventilation.
pressure "Pinsp – PEEP", the lung mechanics (re-
sistance and compliance) and the patient's breath-
ing drive. The pressure rise from the lower pressure
level PEEP to the upper pressure level Pinsp is
controlled by the Slope or Insp. flow setting. The
Description
PC-MMV
Pressure Control-Mandatory Minute Volume

Ventilation
Pressure-controlled ventilation to ensure minimum
minute ventilation
Paw Pressure support PS Pressure limitation

fast slow
Pmax
PEEP
tt
Ti Trigger window
1
RR
Flow
Insp. flow
tt
MV
Set MV
Mandatory MV
Spontaneously breathed MV
t
No spontane- beginning sufficient
ous breathing spontaneous breathing spontaneous breathing
340
Pressure-controlled ventilation with volume In this case, the maximum applied pressure is lim-
guarantee ited to 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) below Paw high. If the
maximum pressure allowed is not enough to deliver
The tidal volume of the mandatory breaths is deter-
the set VT, Babylog VN500 generates an alarm.
mined by the volume VT. The duration of the man-
datory breaths is determined by Ti. The pressure MMV works similar to SIMV, however, the manda-
rise is determined by the Slope or Insp. flow set- tory breaths are only provided if spontaneous
ting. The maximum pressure that Babylog VN500 breathing is not sufficient and below the prescribed
uses is set via the Pmax therapy control. If Pmax is minimum ventilation. Should spontaneous breath-
not linked to the alarm limit Paw high, the pressure ing increase, fewer mandatory breaths will be pro-
can be limited using Paw high. vided. The minimum ventilation is determined by
the setting of the tidal volume VT and the respirato-
ry rate RR.
Description
The maximum number of mandatory breaths is de-

termined by the respiratory rate RR. However, this
number is only provided when there is insufficient
spontaneous breathing or an apnea is present.
Pressure support
breath. By setting the trigger level, the patient's in-
sistance and compliance), and the patient's respira-
Pressures, O2, I:E.
inspiratory flow.
category is limited to 1.5 seconds. In the Neo. pa-
tient category, the maximum inspiratory time is lim-
ited to 130 % of Ti, maximum 1.5 seconds.
Description
PC-HFO
Pressure Control-High Frequency Oscillation

Continuous pressure-controlled ventilation with
high-frequency oscillations at the mean pressure
level
Paw
MAPhf
t
Flow
311
Ventilation with high-frequency pressure oscilla-
tions enables gas to be exchanged in the lungs de-
spite very small tidal volumes (often in the dead
space volume range). While pressure amplitudes
may be considerable in the breathing circuit, only
small fluctuations occur around the mean pressure
in the lungs. The mechanical load due to periodic
expansion and relaxation of the lungs is low.
The mean pressure, around which the oscillations
occur, is determined by MAPhf. The pressure am-
plitude is set directly using the Ampl hf therapy
control. Here, Ampl hf is the difference between
the maximum and minimum pressure of the oscilla-
tion. The rate at which oscillations occur per sec-
ond is set with fhf. Depending on the oscillation fre-
quency fhf, there are up to three different I:E ratios
to choose from:
I:Ehf Oscillation frequency

1:1 5 to 20 Hz
1:2 5 to 15 Hz
1:3 5 to 10 Hz
Description
PC-APRV
Pressure Control-Airway Pressure Release

Ventilation
Spontaneous breathing under continuous positive
airway pressure with brief pressure releases
Paw
Phigh
Plow
t
Thigh
Tlow
Flow
203
The patient breathes spontaneously at a high pres- During the activation of AutoRelease, the duration
sure level Phigh for an adjustable length of time of pressure releases is determined by the expirato-
Thigh. For very short expiratory times Tlow, ry flow trace. The Exp. term. setting determines the
Babylog VN500 switches to a low pressure level percentage by which the expiratory flow must fall
Plow. The normal lung areas are emptied, but the short of in relation to the peak flow for the ventila-
"slow" lung areas only change volume to a lesser tion to return to the high pressure level.
extent*.
When AutoRelease is switched on, the change-
The number of pressure releases is determined by over from the upper pressure level Phigh to the
the Thigh and Tlow settings. The releases are lower pressure level Plow is synchronized with the
time-cycled and are not triggered by the patient. patient's spontaneous breathing.
The duration is determined by Tlow. The tidal vol-
The synchronization of the mandatory breath re-
ume exchanged during the release phases de-
duces the time on the upper pressure level.
pends on the difference in pressure Phigh – Plow,
Babylog VN500 prolongs the subsequent ventila-
the lung mechanics (resistance and compliance)
tion time on the upper pressure level by the missing
and the length of pressure release Tlow. The pres-
time. This prevents an increase in respiratory rate.
sure rise from the lower pressure level Plow to the
upper pressure level Phigh is determined by the
Slope or Insp. flow setting. The start setting can be
configured on the page System setup >
Ventilation > Start settings > Pressures, O2, I:E.
* Literature references [1], [2], [3], [4], see page 276.
Description
SPN-CPAP/PS
Spontaneous-Continuous Positive Airway Pres-

sure/Pressure Support
Spontaneous breathing with continuous positive
pressure level with or without pressure support
Paw Spontaneous breathing

with pressure support PS
fast slow
PEEP
t
Flow
209
When the pressure support is not switched on, the The pressure support is also terminated as soon as
patient's spontaneous breathing is merely support- the duration of the support has reached the maxi-
ed by an increased PEEP. mum inspiratory time. For intubated patients, the
breath. The time, number, and duration of pres-
sure-supported breaths is determined by the pa-
tient's spontaneous breathing.
sistance and compliance) and the patient's respira-
Pressures, O2, I:E.
inspiratory flow.
Description
SPN-CPAP/VS
Spontaneous-Continuous Positive Airway Pres-

sure/Volume Support
Spontaneous breathing with continuous positive
pressure level with or without volume support
Paw
PEEP
t
Flow
210
For volume support VS, every inspiratory effort by port, the support pressure is automatically adjusted
the patient on PEEP level that meets the trigger cri- to changes in lung conditions (resistance and com-
teria triggers a volume-supported breath. By setting pliance) and to the spontaneous breathing demand
the trigger level, the patient's inspiratory efforts are of the patient.
synchronized. The time, number, and duration of
If Paw high is linked to the therapy control
volume-supported breaths is determined by the pa-
Pmax, set the maximum pressure that can be
tient's spontaneous breathing. The pressure rise is
applied with the Pmax setting!
determined by the Slope or Insp. flow setting. The
start setting can be configured on the page System If Paw high is not linked to the Pmax therapy
setup > Ventilation > Start settings > Pressures, control, always set the Paw high alarm limit so
O2, I:E. that Babylog VN500 generates an alarm in the
event of an increase in airway pressure due to
The volume support is terminated as soon as the
reduced compliance. The maximum pressure
that can be applied is limited to 5 mbar
inspiratory flow.
(5 cmH2O) below the upper alarm limit.
The volume support is also terminated as soon as
The set tidal volume of the supported breaths is
reached through the automatically selected pres-
sure level of the volume support. With volume sup-
Description
SPN-PPS
Spontaneous-Proportional Pressure Support

Spontaneous breathing with flow- and volume-
proportional pressure support
Flow Assist: Pressure curve proportional to flow

Flow
VT
t
Paw
PEEP
Inspiration Expiration t
Vol. Assist: Inspiratory pressure curve proportional to tidal volume VT

Flow
VT
t
Paw
PEEP
Inspiration Expiration t 224
In ventilation mode SPN-PPS, Babylog VN500 The degree of support in PPS mode can be set sep-
supports the patient's spontaneous breathing in arately according to the resistive and elastic com-
proportion to the inspiratory effort. If the patient ponents. The amount of resistive unloading by
breathes strongly, Babylog VN500 supports this ef- Babylog VN500 is determined by the user through
fort with high pressure support. If the patient has the resistive Flow Assist component. The amount
shallow breathing, Babylog VN500 reacts with low of elastic unloading taken over by Babylog VN500
pressure support. Mechanical support is omitted al- is determined by the user through the elastic Vol.
together if there is no spontaneous breathing. Mo- Assist component. This support is only effective
nitoring of apnea and minute volume must there- during inspiration.
fore be set appropriately.
Description

inspiratory flow.
If Paw high is linked to the therapy control
Pmax, set the maximum pressure that can be
applied with the Pmax setting!
If Paw high is not linked to the Pmax therapy
control, always set the Paw high alarm limit so
that Babylog VN500 generates an alarm in the
event of an increase in airway pressure with
due to compliance. The maximum pressure that
can be applied is limited to 5 mbar (5 cmH2O)
below the upper alarm limit.
Description
Additional settings for ventilation
Apnea Ventilation
For switching over automatically to volume-

guaranteed mandatory ventilation in case of apnea.
Paw
Start of Apnea Ventilation
Spontaneous breathing
with pressure support
PEEP
t
Apnea alarm time 1
Tapn RRapn
Flow
317
For Babylog VN500 to be able to detect an apnea, Apnea ventilation is terminated by touching the
neonatal flow measurement must function and neo- Apn. Vent. reset button. Babylog VN500 continues
natal flow monitoring must be activated. ventilating in the previously set ventilation mode.
Changing the ventilation mode or additional set-
Babylog VN500 detects an apnea when no expira-
tings, e.g., PS, also terminates apnea ventilation.
tory flow is measured or insufficient inspiratory gas
is delivered during the set apnea alarm time Tapn. If an apnea situation generating an alarm occurs
If apnea ventilation is activated, Babylog VN500 again during apnea ventilation, this indicates that
starts volume-guaranteed ventilation with the venti- the apnea ventilation respiratory rate RRapn has
lation parameters RRapn and VTapn. The inspira- been set too low in relation to apnea alarm time
tory time for apnea ventilation is determined from Tapn.
the set apnea respiratory rate RRapn and a fixed
I:E ratio of 1:2.
Automatic return from apnea ventilation
The patient can breathe spontaneously and the
If the Auto return from Apnea Vent. function is
mandatory breaths are synchronized with the pa-
configured, Babylog VN500 automatically switches
tient's spontaneous breathing. The apnea ventila-
to the previous ventilation mode when sufficient
tion respiratory rate RRapn remains constant.
spontaneous breathing is resumed. The following
Babylog VN500 provides synchronized intermittent
conditions must be met:
mandatory ventilation.
Description
– Apnea ventilation must have been active for at

least 2 minutes.
– The alarm message MV low is not active.
– One of the following conditions must additional-
ly be met:
– The ratio of MVspon to MV must be greater
than 25 % and the ratio of MVleak to MV is
less than 40 %.
Or
– 80 % of the mandatory breaths must be trig-
gered spontaneously.
If apnea reoccurs within 3 minutes following auto-
matic termination of apnea ventilation in the Ped.
pat. patient category, the Auto return from Apnea
Vent. function is disabled until apnea ventilation is
terminated manually or another ventilation mode is
selected.
For configuration of the Auto return from Apnea
Vent. function, see "Configuring general settings"
on page 158.
Description
Flow trigger
The flow trigger is used to synchronize mandatory

or pressure-supported breaths with spontaneous
breathing.
Paw
Spontaneous
breathing
PEEP
t
Flow
Trigger threshold
t
230
With the Flow trigger trigger threshold, the manda-
tory breaths are synchronized with the inspiratory
efforts. The start setting of the flow trigger can be
configured on the the page System setup >
Ventilation > Start settings > VT, RR, Trigger.
Spontaneous breathing activity by the patient is in-
dicated on screen by the brief appearance of the
symbol.
The flow trigger is automatically leakage compen-
sated.
Description
Inspiratory termination
Paw
t
Start of inspiration End of inspiration
Flow

t
228
For spontaneous breaths supported with PS, VS
and PPS , the length of inspiration is determined by
the inspiratory termination criterion. Inspiratory ter-
mination specifies at which percentage of the peak
inspiratory flow expiration is to start.
This value is set at 15 % by default and is automat-
ically leakage compensated.
Description
Sigh
Paw Interval sigh

Cycles sigh
ΔintPEEP
PEEP
t
220
Atelectasis can be prevented by activating the sigh
function and setting the sigh in the form of an inter-
mittent PEEP. The purpose of expiratory sigh is to
open collapsed areas of the lung or to keep open
"more dependent" areas of the lung.
The sigh function can be activated in all ventilation
modes with mandatory breaths, except for PC-
APRV. When the sigh function is activated, the end-
expiratory pressure PEEP increases by the set val-
ue of the intermittent PEEP.
The time between the two sigh phases can be set
with the therapy control Interval sigh.
The therapy control Cycles sigh controls how
many respiratory cycles are covered by the sigh
phase. The average airway pressure is higher, and
a longer filling time is normally available.
In pressure-controlled ventilation, the inspiratory
pressures Pinsp, Psupp increase by the amount
ΔintPEEP.
Description
HFO-Sigh
During high-frequency oscillation, a sigh can be set

(RRsigh).
Paw
Psigh
MAPhf
t
Flow Tisigh
313
RRsigh determines how often per minute the sigh
is to occur. A conventional pressure-controlled
breath is applied with the pressure Psigh. The du-
ration of this breath is set with Tisigh. The high-fre-
quency oscillations are discontinued for at least
150 ms prior to the sigh and are resumed 250 ms
after the sigh. The high-frequency oscillations start
with an expiration.
Rise time and rise form of the sigh are determined
by the configuration Slope adjustment (Slope or
Insp. flow).
The sigh can also be triggered with the Man. in-
sp./hold function. The duration of the sigh is deter-
mined by touching and holding the Man. insp./hold
button.
Description
Volume Guarantee
Paw
Paw high
Pinsp = RR (VT, C)
PEEP
t
Ti Te
1
Flow RR
VT
without spontaneous
breathing with spontaneous breathing
225
With the Volume Guarantee additional setting, the If Pmax is not linked to the alarm limit Paw high,
mandatory breaths are volume controlled. To apply Babylog VN500 increases Pinsp up to a maximum
the set tidal volume, Babylog VN500 controls the of 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) below the set alarm limit Paw
inspiratory plateau pressure Pinsp. high.
Changes in lung conditions (compliance, resis- Fluctuations in spontaneous breathing are also
tance) are compensated. The tidal volume of the compensated. The greater the patient’s inspiratory
mandatory breaths remains constant. efforts, the lower the pressure Babylog VN500
applies. Thus with Volume Guarantee,
Volume Guarantee can be switched on in the
Babylog VN500 always ventilates with just the right
PC-SIMV, PC-CMV, PC-AC and PC-PSV ventila-
pressure required for the tidal volume desired. The
tion modes. In the PC-MMV and SPN-CPAP/VS
pressure load on the lungs is limited to the extent
ventilation modes, volume guarantee is always
absolutely necessary.
available.
Without Volume Guarantee, the user must adjust
The advantage in contrast to time-cycled, pressure-
the inspiratory pressure to reach the tidal volume
limited ventilation, is that changes in lung condi-
desired.
tions (compliance, resistance) have no impact on
the tidal volume. If, for example, compliance in- The control works in the range PEEP + 0.1 mbar
creases, the inspiratory pressure decreases auto- (+ 0.1 cmH2O) to Pmax (or Paw high – 5 mbar
matically. If, for instance, compliance decreases, (5 cmH2O)) for spontaneous breaths. For triggered
then pressure rises but only up to the set pressure mandatory breaths, the control works in the range
limit Pmax. PEEP + 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) to Pmax (or Paw high
– 5 mbar (5 cmH2O)). Using the setting Pmax or
the alarm limit Paw high – 5 mbar (5 cmH2O), the
user limits the maximum pressure of the device.
Description
The set tidal volume cannot be applied under these If the flow sensor fails, ventilation is continued with
conditions: the pressure used last and Babylog VN500 gener-
– Pmax is insufficient ates an alarm.
– The inspiratory pressure pattern has no plateau
Set the alarm limits MV high and MV low appropri-
because the flow is too low or the inspiratory
ately in order to avoid excessive or insufficient flow
time Ti is too short.
following rapid changes in compliance. When using
A set inspiratory time Ti shorter than the lung filling Volume Guarantee, activate flow monitoring!
time can be recognized from the flow curve. The
flow at the end of the inspiratory time has not
Start-up procedure with volume guarantee
dropped to zero. In this case, it must be decided
whether the current condition of the patient permits On switching on the Volume Guarantee function,
prolongation of the inspiratory time Ti in order to re- Babylog VN500 applies the set tidal volume VT by
duce peak pressure further. This effect can also be delivering a pressure-controlled breath with an in-
caused during ventilation, e.g., due to a build-up of spiratory pressure of 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) above the
secretions. In this situation, the pressure is limited set PEEP. Babylog VN500 measures the applied
by Babylog VN500 as described. volume in this case and calculates an initial target
pressure for the set volume. The next mandatory
If the tidal volume measured is 90 % below the set
breath is applied with an inspiratory pressure that
tidal volume, Babylog VN500 generates an alarm.
corresponds to 75 % of this target pressure.
The control occurs gradually from breath to breath. Babylog VN500 measures the applied volume
The tidal volume is measured, then compared to again here and calculates a new target pressure for
the set tidal volume and a new plateau pressure is the set volume. The next mandatory breath is ap-
calculated for the next breath. After a change to the plied with this target pressure. As described above,
set tidal volume, the inspiratory pressure required the following mandatory breaths are changed in the
for this is reached after just a few breaths. inspiratory pressure so that the set volume is
reached on average.
In the Neo. patient category, the tidal volume mea-
sured on the expiratory side is taken as a basis for
the control. In the Ped. pat. patient category, the in-
spiratory tidal volume is used. If leakage compen-
Volume Guarantee (HFO)
sation is activated, the leakage-compensated tidal
volume is used for the control. With the volume guarantee of the high-frequency
oscillation (VG (HF)), Babylog VN500 calculates
The minimum inspiratory pressure for mandatory the amplitudes required to reach the set tidal vol-
non-triggered breaths is 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) above ume VThf. The Ampl hf therapy control is inactive
PEEP; for triggered mandatory and pressure- when volume guarantee is switched on. If the set
supported spontaneous breaths it is 0.1 mbar VThf is not reached, Babylog VN500 generates an
(0.1 cmH2O) above PEEP. alarm.
In case of major tube leakage, the actual tidal vol-
ume in the patient's lungs can (as in other ventila-
tion modes also) be larger than the tidal volume
measured on the expiratory side. Then the inspira-
tory and expiratory tidal volumes are different. If, in
the course of an inspiration, the delivered and mea-
sured VT exceeds the set VT by an amount depen-
dent on the actual leakage rate, Babylog VN500
terminates the inspiration and starts the expiration.
Description
ATC
Automatic Tube Compensation

Compensation of the tube resistance
Paw
Pressure at Y-piece
Ptrach
Tracheal pressure
PEEP
t
Flow
226
ATC controls the airway pressure at the tracheal Calculating tracheal pressure
level. This function calculates and displays the tra-
Babylog VN500 calculates tracheal pressure on the
cheal pressure on the basis of a mathematical tube
basis of a square function of tube resistance and
model, the set tube type and the inside diameter of
patient flow.
the tube.
When tube compensation is activated, PTrachea = Paw – KTube x Flow2
Babylog VN500 displays the calculated tracheal PTrachea: Pressure in the trachea
pressure in the pressure curve together with the
pressure at the Y-piece as a line. Activated tube Paw: Pressure at the Y-piece of the breathing
compensation is indicated by ATC and the tube di- circuit
ameter in the page header bar. KTube: Tube coefficient (see table on page 259)
When selecting loops, tracheal pressure can also Flow: Patient flow
be selected as a parameter. Tracheal pressure can
also be displayed when tube compensation is de- Inspiration: Flow >0
activated, if the calculation of tracheal pressure Exspiration: Flow <0
was activated on the screen Start/Standby >
Tube/NIV and the tube type and diameter were en- The selected tube type and the inside diameter of
tered. Babylog VN500 uses this value for calculat- the tube must correspond with the real tube for cor-
ing leakage and determining lung mechanics, but rect calculation and display of the tracheal pres-
not for tube compensation. The selected degree of sure. This is required for correct tube compensa-
compensation is not considered when displaying tion.
tracheal pressure or when determining leakage and
lung mechanics.
Description
When tube compensation is activated, the ventila- Calculating the support

tion pressure in the breathing circuit is increased
The level of support ΔPaw applied during ATC is
during inspiration or decreased during expiration.
calculated on the basis of a square function of tube
The airway pressure is adjusted to the tracheal lev-
resistance and patient flow.
el if 100 % compensation of the tube resistance has
been selected. ΔPaw = Comp. x KTube x Flow2
Expiratory tube compensation can be deactivated. Comp.: Degree of compensation 0 to 100 %
For the mandatory portion of the breath, inspiratory KTube: Tube coefficient (see table on page 259)
tube compensation can be deactivated.
Flow: Patient flow
When tube compensation is activated,
Babylog VN500 controls the ventilation pressure so
that the resistive work of breathing on the tube is Tube coefficient
compensated in accordance with the selected de- The tube coefficient KTube is largely determined on
gree of compensation. the basis of the results obtained by Guttmann et al*.
Depending on the direction of the patient flow, the The tube coefficient KTube for the full-length tube is
airway pressure is increased during inspiration or always taken as the basis. The effect of the short-
decreased during expiration. ened length is negligible.
The airway pressure can be reduced to a minimum The values for the tube coefficients are shown in
of 0 mbar (0 cmH2O). the following tables.
The maximum value for the airway pressure can be
set using the Pmax therapy control. If Pmax is not
linked to the alarm limit Paw high, the maximum
pressure is limited to 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) below the
Paw high alarm limit. The pressure limitation mes-
sage is displayed when the maximum permitted
values are reached.
If the value selected for Paw high or Pmax is too
low, it may impair the effectiveness of tube compen-
sation. If the value selected for Paw high or Pmax
is too high, it may result in unwanted high airway
pressures. When setting Pmax, be aware that this
value may actually be reached in contrast to the
value for Paw high.
* Literature reference [5], see page 276
Description
Table for endotracheal tube: Table for tracheostomy tube:
Endotracheal Inside Tube Tracheostomy Inside Tube

tube diameter of coefficient tube diameter of coefficient
the tube KTube the tube KTube
(mm) (mbar/L2/s2) (mm) (mbar/L2/s2)
2.00 1834.00
2.50 600.00 2.50 600.00
3.00 340.00 3.00 340.00
3.50 170.00 3.50 170.00
4.00 100.00 4.00 100.00
4.50 50.00 4.50 50.00
5.00 30.96 5.00 30.96
5.50 23.70 5.50 15.40
6.00 17.21 6.00 10.00
6.50 13.05 6.50 7.90
7.00 10.56 7.00 6.38
7.50 8.41 7.50 5.20
8.00 6.57 8.00 4.50
Description
AutoRelease
Paw
Start of Start of t
Flow exsp. insp.
t
AutoRelease Exp. term.
229
In ventilation mode PC-APRV, the duration of pres-
sure release is determined from the expiratory flow
curve when AutoRelease is activated. The Exp.
term. setting specifies when the ventilation returns
to the pressure level Phigh dependent on the de-
cline in percent of the peak expiratory flow. The
therapy control Tlow max limits the maximum du-
ration of pressure release.
When AutoRelease is switched on, the change-
over from the upper pressure level Phigh to the
lower pressure level Plow is synchronized with the
patient's spontaneous breathing.
The synchronization of the mandatory breath
reduces the time on the upper pressure level.
Babylog VN500 prolongs the subsequent ventila-
tion time on the upper pressure level by the missing
time.
Description
Special procedures
Medication nebulization The medication nebulizer nebulizes continuously.

The aerosol generated during expiration does not
reach the lungs, however. The medication nebuliz-
Insp. O2 concentration during medication er is supplied with compressed air, O2, or a mixture
nebulization of compressed air and O2 by Babylog VN500, de-
Only use medication nebulizer 8411030. If other pending on the set O2 concentration.
medication nebulizers are used, considerable devi- The graph shows the possible deviations of the ap-
ations may occur in the tidal volume and the in- plied O2 concentration from the set FiO2 concentra-
spiratory O2 concentration! tion with respiratory rates above 12/min.
To minimize the deviation from the set O2 concen-
tration, Babylog VN500 uses a gas mixture to drive
the medication nebulizer. The gas mixture is gener-
ated by switching over between compressed air
and O2 in short time intervals.
Applied O2 concentration FiO2 in Vol%.
Set O2 concentration FiO2 in Vol%.

221
Description
C20/C Smart Pulmonary View
The C20/C index is a calculation of the compliance Graphic display of lung characteristics
of the last 20 % (C20) of a breath in relation to the
Smart Pulmonary View is a graphic display of lung
compliance (C) of the entire breath.
flexibility (compliance) and resistance of the air-
During a breath, Babylog VN500 determines con- ways (resistance).
tinuously the pressure applied and the resulting tid-
The representation corresponds to the displayed
al volume. The compliance of the last 20 % of a
measured values of the respective patient.
breath determined in this manner is set in propor-
tion to the total compliance. The display range of compliance is 0 to
400 mL/mbar (400 mL/cmH2O).
From the ratio determined, the following informa-
tion can be derived: The display range of resistance is 0 to 300 mbar/L/s
(300 cmH2O/L/s).
– C20/C <1: A decrease of compliance at the end
of the breath was detected. The lungs may be To detect an improvement or deterioration of the
overinflated. patient’s condition with regard to compliance and
resistance, it is possible to adapt the representation
– C20/C >1: An increase of compliance at the end
to the current values of the patient. One measuring
of the breath was detected. Tidal recruitment
range starts at 0 and goes to double the value of the
may be present.
current compliance; the other measuring range
– C20/C = 1: No change in compliance at the end starts at 0 and goes to double the value of the cur-
of a breath could be detected. The lungs are not rent resistance. After the adaptation, the measuring
overinflated, nor is tidal recruitment present. values determined are displayed as reference val-
ues with the time and date. In the graph, the current
The calculation of C20/C takes into account the ef-
values (calibration values) are displayed as an or-
fect of the resistance of the endotracheal tube used
ange broken line. The scales for compliance and
or the tracheostomy tube used. For this, the tube di-
resistance are adapted.
ameter is required. The correct diameter entry of
the tube used determines the quality of the C20/C The compliance and resistance measured respec-
index calculated. tively are displayed by thin or thick lines according-
ly.
The C20/C index is always displayed as long as a
correction delivers plausible results with regard to The point when the maximum value that is based
the resistance. If, for instance, a smaller tube diam- on the last calibration is reached is represented
eter was entered than that of the tube actually used, with a red line as a boundary. This indicates that the
a correction to the measured values may deliver an measured values determined can no longer be rep-
implausible result. In this case, no C20/C index is resented graphically. The measured values are be-
displayed. The parameter field remains empty. yond the display range. Babylog VN500 displays a
request for a new calibration.
The diaphragm is displayed schematically under-
neath the representation of the lung. The move-
ment of the diaphragm indicates synchronized
mandatory breaths or supported (triggered)
breaths.
Description
The ratio between spontaneous breathing and

mandatory ventilation is displayed in a diagram:
– RRspon and VTspon represent the spontane-
ous minute volume as an area,
– RRmand and VTmand represent the mandato-
ry minute volume as an area.
The display is a qualitative representation of the re-
spective minute volume.
From this, the following information can be derived:
– The ratio between the spontaneous and man-
datory minute volumes,
– The quality and pattern of the spontaneous
breathing, e. g. Rapid Shallow Breathing
Smart Pulmonary View is a qualitative representa-
tion of the ventilation situation. Local pathophysio-
logical peculiarities, such as atelectasis or airway
obstructions of the lungs, cannot be displayed.
Furthermore, individual patient situations cannot be
displayed, such as the condition after a pneumec-
tomy or a diaphragmatic hernia.
Description
Description of the therapy types
O2 Therapy
The O2 Therapy function can be used for patients

with independent breathing. The continuous flow is
applied via an oxygen mask, a hood, or nasal can-
nula. The O2 concentration and the flow can be set.
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation
Non-invasive ventilation by prongs or mask for pa-

tients with spontaneous breathing
Leakages are greater with non-invasive ventilation
than with invasive ventilation. Babylog VN500
takes into account the leakages in the NIV applica-
tion mode accordingly.
The Tdisconnect setting can be used to delay the
Airway pressure low alarm.
In the Neo. patient category, only the SPN-CPAP or
PC-CMV ventilation modes may be selected. When
using prongs or a mask, the neonatal flow sensor
must be removed from the breathing circuit.
Babylog VN500 switches off the neonatal flow
monitoring.
Flow reduction
If a disconnection is detected, flow delivery is re-
duced until after reconnection.
Description
Automatic leakage compensation
Mode of operation Example of leakage compensation with flow

trigger or inspiratory termination criterion
Babylog VN500 determines the difference between
the measured flow on the inspiratory side and the The mode of operation is illustrated using a simpli-
measured flow on the expiratory side. This differ- fied example with the following values:
ence provides a measure of the amount of leakage – Flow trigger setting 0.2 L/min
and is displayed by Babylog VN500 as the leakage – Leakage increases from 0 % to 20 %
minute volume MVleak and relative as % leak
Mode of operation without leakage compensation:
(MVleak to MV).
If the leakage flow is above the flow trigger thresh-
The calculation of leakage compensation takes into old, the user must increase the flow trigger thresh-
account the airway pressures. A higher percentage old in order to avoid auto-triggering. If the leakage
of volume is lost on the inspiratory side than on the is reduced, the user must increase the sensitivity of
expiratory side because the pressure during inspi- the flow trigger again. The same applies to the in-
ration is higher. The displayed leakage minute vol- spiratory termination criterion in specific ventilation
ume MVleak is based on the mean pressure modes.
Pmean. The leakage minute volume MVleak also
Mode of operation with leakage compensation:
takes the inspiratory leakages into account. Due to
Babylog VN500 determines the leakage flow. The
technical tolerances, a small leakage minute vol-
leakage flow is subtracted from the total flow in or-
ume may be displayed even if the tube leakage is
der to determine the patient flow. Only this flow is
closed. If there is a rapid change in the leakage,
used for the flow trigger or the inspiratory termina-
e.g., by the leak being opened or closed suddenly,
tion criterion. After a few breaths Babylog VN500
Babylog VN500 needs a few breaths to identify the
"learns" the leakage and avoids auto-triggering. If
new leakage value. Babylog VN500 prevents any
the leakage is closed, the sensitivity of the flow trig-
potential rises in pressure resulting from this.
ger is automatically increased again. The same ap-
The inspiratory flow trigger threshold and the in- plies to the inspiratory termination criterion for
spiratory termination criterion are applied to the breaths with pressure support or volume support.
leakage-compensated flow, with both settings be-
ing continuously optimized with regards to the leak-
Leakage rate
age. This automatic adjustment also takes place if
leakage compensation is deactivated. Babylog VN500 determines the mean leakage flow
from the difference between inspiratory minute vol-
If leakage compensation is activated, the values
ume MVi and expiratory minute volume MVe (dis-
measured for volume and flow as well as the curves
played as MV). Standardized as MVi, the result is
for flow and volume are displayed with leakage cor-
the leakage rate displayed in percent:
rection, with the exception of the minute volume
measured during expiration and all measured val- Leakage rate = 100 % x (MVi – MVe) / MVi
ues which are explicitly marked as inspiratory or ex-
piratory, such as VTi and VTe.
Activating or deactivating leakage compensation
on page System setup > Ventilation > General
settings.
Description
Measurements
Measurement principles CO2 measurement

CO2 is measured via a mainstream system based
Neonatal flow measurement on absorption measurement.
The flow is measured with a hot wire anemometer A light source generates a spectrum. Two light de-
between the Y-piece and the tube. The flow direc- tectors record the characteristic absorption spec-
tion is detected by the use of two hot wires, one of trum and supply electrical signals that change with
which is shielded on one side. the CO2 concentration.
The amount of energy required to maintain the wire These signals are then evaluated and displayed.
at a temperature of 400 °C (752 °F) is used as a Heating the CO2 sensor probe prevents condensa-
measure of the flow passing through the sensor, tion.
cooling the hot wire in the process.
The lowest flow at which detection functions reli-
ably is 0.2 L/min. Lower flow values are therefore
suppressed and displayed as zero.
Two different sensor types are available:
– Y-sensor, integrated in the Y-piece
– ISO sensor to insert between Y-piece and tube
connector
Both sensor types use the same sensor insert. De-
spite this, the sensor properties are not identical.
The sensor type is set in the Sensors/Parameters
> Neonatal flow dialog window in order to adapt
the measurement for this type of sensor optimally.
O2 measurement
A heating and a temperature sensor are positioned
in a homogeneous magnetic field which is periodi-
cally activated and deactivated. The thermal con-
ductivity of O2 changes due to the magnetic field.
The change in thermal conductivity is a measure for
the O2 concentration.
Description
Airway pressure measurement During inspiration, the value measured by the expi-
ratory pressure sensor (Pexp) is raised relative to
Babylog VN500 measures the airway pressure in- the airway pressure by the amount of the pressure
directly by means of two internal pressure sensors. drop caused by the flow (normally
The sensors are installed in the inspiratory and ex- (Flowout ≤ Flowbf) through the expiratory line of the
piratory lines, thereby eliminating the need for an breathing circuit (Rexp):
external pressure measuring line between the Paw = Pexp + Rexp x Flowout
Y-piece and the device. As long as one side is with-
out flow, the measured value of the flowless pres- Paw: Airway pressure at the Y-piece
sure sensor corresponds to the airway pressure at
the Y-piece. Pexp: Airway pressure in expiratory breathing
hose
During ventilation, there is a constant basic flow.
Rexp: Flow resistance of the expiratory breath-
However, due to this constant basic flow, the zero-
ing hose
flow condition is never attained either on the in-
spiratory or expiratory side. The pressure mea- Flowout: Flow through the expiratory valve during
sured by the inspiratory pressure sensor varies with inspiration
the variations in airway pressure but is increased
by the pressure drop in the inspiratory line of the The hose resistances are determined by
breathing circuit. The pressure measured by the Babylog VN500 during the device check.
expiratory pressure sensor is reduced by the pres- The user can configure whether the setting occurs
sure drop in the expiratory line of the breathing cir- via the pressure ramp Slope with a basic flow of
cuit. These pressure differences are caused by the 6 L/min or with an adjustable inspiratory flow
flow resistance of the breathing circuit. Insp. flow and an expiratory basic flow of 6 L/min.
During expiration, the value measured at the in-
spiratory pressure sensor (Pinsp) is reduced by the
pressure drop caused by the basic flow (Flowbf) in
the inspiratory line of the breathing circuit (Rinsp):
Paw = Pinsp – Rinsp x Flowbf
Paw: Airway pressure at the Y-piece

Pinsp: Airway pressure at the inspiratory pres-
sure sensor
Rinsp: Flow resistance of the inspiratory breath-
ing hose
Flowbf: Basic flow
Description
Pneumatic functional description
Pneumatic circuit diagram of Babylog VN500
A 8 B 9 10 11
3 5 7 p 18 F
17 E 30 15
4 6 p CO2
E V 12
20 E E
2 19
28
13
27
23 24 G C 14 Air
O2
25 H E D Insp. gas
21 O2 p
E 29 Exp. gas
I 26 E 16
22 Nebulizer gas
198
1 Air gas inlet 16 Barometric pressure sensor
2 O2 gas inlet 17 Calibration valve for inspiratory pressure sensor
3 Air non-return valve 18 Inspiratory pressure sensor
4 O2 non-return valve 19 Calibration valve for expiratory pressure sensor
5 Air metering valve 20 Expiratory pressure sensor
6 O2 metering valve 21 O2 sensor
7 Tank 22 Nebulizer outlet
8 Mixed gas metering valve 23 Air pressure regulator
9 Safety valve 24 O2 pressure regulator
10 Emergency expiratory valve 25 Nebulizer mixer valve
11 Emergency breathing valve 26 Nebulizer changeover valve
12 Patient's lungs 27 Ejector changeover valve
13 Expiratory valve 28 Ejector
14 Non-return valve 29 Silencer
15 Neonatal flow sensor 30 CO2 sensor
Description
A Gas mixture and gas metering assembly neous breathing. The neonatal flow sensor (15)
measures the inspiratory flow and the expiratory
B Inspiratory unit assembly
flow in accordance with the hot-wire anemometry
C Expiratory unit assembly measurement principle. Therefore the measured
flow is a mass flow (NTPD).
D Silencer
The ejector (28) generates the negative pressure
E Barometric pressure sensor
required for the HFO mode. For this purpose, the
F Pressure measurement assembly ejector valve (27) supplies the driving gas (medica-
tion nebulization assembly/ Ejector drive (I).
G Calibration assembly
To reduce disruptive noises, the flow is passed be-
H O2 sensor
hind the expiratory valve (13) via the silencer (D,
I Medication nebulization assembly/Ejector drive 29) into the surrounding area.
The inspiratory unit, the expiratory valve and the si-
Description of the pneumatic mode of operation lencer assemblies can be detached from
Babylog VN500 for cleaning purposes.
Babylog VN500 consists of 9 pneumatic assem-
blies. The mass flow to volume flow conversion (BTPS)
requires knowledge of the ambient pressure. The
The gas mixture and dosage (A) assembly deliv-
ambient pressure is measured with the barometric
ers the time-variable flow of a gas mixture with ad-
pressure sensor (E, 16).
justable proportions of O2 and air. Gas from the
(central) gas supply enters the device via the gas The pressure in the breathing system is measured
inlet connections for O2 and air (1, 2). Two non-re- with two independent pressure sensors (18, 20)
turn valves (3, 4) prevent one gas from returning to that form the pressure measurement (F) assem-
the supply line of the other gas. The mixing of the bly. The pressure sensors are regularly zero cali-
gases takes place in the tank (7) and is controlled brated. For this, the pressure sensors are connect-
via two control valves (5, 6). The supplied inspirato- ed to ambient pressure via the two calibration
ry flow is controlled via a third control valve (8). valves (17, 19). The calibration valves form the cal-
ibration (G) assembly.
The inspiratory unit (B) assembly consists of the
safety valve (9) and two non-return valves (10, 11). The O2 sensor (H, 21) measures the inspiratory O2
In normal operation, the safety valve is closed so concentration based on a sidestream measure-
that the inspiratory flow is supplied to the patient ment principle. For calibration by the user during
(12) from the gas mixture and gas metering assem- the device check, the O2 sensor can be flushed with
bly. During other operating states, e. g., when pure O2 from the tank (7).
Babylog VN500 is in standby, the safety valve is
A pneumatic medication nebulizer can be connect-
open and enables spontaneous inspiration by the
ed to the nebulizer gas outlet (22) for medication
emergency breathing valve (11). The emergency
nebulization. Babylog VN500 provides an intermit-
expiratory valve (10) provides a second channel for
tent gas flow consisting of O2 and air to drive the
expiration when the expiratory valve (13) is
medication nebulizer. This guarantees that the de-
blocked.
viation of the set O2 concentration remains within
The expiratory valve (C) assembly consists of the the specified limits. The gas from the two gas inlet
expiratory valve (13) and a non-return valve (14). connections (1, 2) is throttled by the pressure regu-
The expiratory valve is a proportional valve and is lators (23, 24).
used to adjust the pressure in the breathing sys-
tem. In conjunction with the spring-loaded valve of
the emergency air outlet (10), the non-return valve
(14) prevents pendulum breathing during sponta-
Description
The intermittent gas delivery is done by the nebuliz-

er mixer valve (25). The nebulizer changeover
valve (26) closes the nebulizer gas outlet when the
nebulizer function is not switched on.
The nebulizer mixer valve, the nebulizer
changeover valve, the ejector changeover valve,
the nebulizer outlet and the two pressure regulators
form the medication nebulization/ejector drive
(I) assembly.
The CO2 concentration of the breathing gas can be
measured using the CO2 sensor (30). CO2 is mea-
sured according to an optical measuring principle in
the mainstream.
Babylog VN500 works at an elevated positive pres-
sure of up to 10 bar (1000 kPa or 145 psi) without
restrictions.
Description
Main menu bar structure
The following table lists the buttons of the main buttons are freely configurable and are assigned to
menu bar with the resulting dialog windows of the the respective group. The freely configurable but-
same name and the tabs. Touching a tab opens the tons open the corresponding page in the dialog win-
corresponding page. The dark gray buttons are al- dow or activate a function.
ways contained in the main menu bar. The white
Group Button in Horizontal tab Vertical tab Additional tabs

symbol main menu bar
Alarms... Limits
Current alarms
Alarm history
Settings
Alarm vol./tone
Ventilation settings... Modes 1, 2, 3, 4
Basic settings
Additional settings
Overview
Apnea Ventilation
Trigger
Sigh
Volume Guarantee
ATC
Auto Release
Mode 5
(e.g. PC-HFO)
Basic settings
Additional settings
Overview
Volume Guarantee
(HFO)
HFO-Sigh
Other modes
Trigger
Apnea continue next page
Description

Views...
1 2 3
Day/Night
Freeze waveforms
Export screenshot
Main screen
Trends/Data... Trends
Graphics 1
Graphics 2
Table
Values
Customized data
Values 1
Values 2
Settings
Logbook
Export data
Logbook
Trends table
Customized data
Special procedures... Functions
Med. nebulization
Nebulization
O2 suction
Man. insp./hold
Sensors/ Neonatal flow
Parameters...
FiO2
CO2
Zero calib. on/off
Check sensor
Calibration
Neo. flow sensor
O2 sensor
CO2 sensor continue next page
Description

System setup... Screen layout
Overview
General settings
Views
Customized data
Config. buttons
Trends graphic 1
Trends graphic 2
Therapy bar
Alarms
Overview
Preset limits
Alarm vol./tone
Ventilation
Overview
Patient category
Modes
Start settings
VT, RR, Trigger
Pressures, O2, I:E
Other settings
ATC
HFO
General settings
Maneuver
Config. exchange
Applications
Exchange intervals
System continue next page
Description

Overview
Country
Units
Interface COM
External display
Supply units
Service System Information
Operating Data
Options
Service Call
Applications
Start/ Standby...
Start/Standby
Tube/NIV
Br. circuit/ Humidifier
System check Overview
Device check
Breathing circ.
check
Accessory status
Description
Factory-set screen views
View 1
FiO2
Waveform Paw
Pmean
Waveform Flow MV
RR
View 2
FiO2
Waveform Paw
Pmean
MV
Waveform Flow
VT
Cdyn
Waveform Volume
R
View 3
Waveform Paw Cdyn
C20/Cdyn
Loop Pressure Volume
R
Τau
% leak
088
Description
Literature references
[1] Meyer, J.:

Neue Beatmungsformen Anästhesiol.
Intensivmed. Notfallmed. Schmerzther.
26 (1991) 337 - 342
[2] Vincent, J.-L.: Yearbook of Intensive Care
and Emergency Medicine
Springer-Verlag 1993
[3] Stock MC, Downs JB, Frolicher D (1987):
Airway pressure release ventilation.
Critical Care Medicine 15:462 - 466
[4] Räsänen J, Cane R, Downs J, et al. (1991):
Airway pressure release ventilation during
acute lung injury: A prospective multicenter
trial.
Critical Care Medicine 19:1234 - 1241
[5] Guttmann, Wolf et al: Continuous
Calculation of Tracheal Pressure in
Tracheally Intubated Patients,
Anesthesiology, Vol.79, Sept. 1993.
Index
Index
A B
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Bacterial filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Basic settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Battery
Additional buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Additional settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Start-up settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Before reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Body height/body weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Alarm – Cause – Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Breathing circuit
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Alarm limits Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Automatic setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configure start-up values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Breathing gas humidifier
Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
In the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . . 115 Reprocess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Breathing hoses
Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Alarm tone Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Set volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 C
Alarms
Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 C20/C, Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Current alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Check readiness for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Display causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . 113 Cleaning, disinfection, and sterilization . . . . . 193
Anti Air Shower CO2 monitoring
Switching on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Apnea ventilation Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 CO2 sensor
Switching auto return on or off . . . . . . . . . . 158 Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Switching on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Check with test filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Check with test gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Application mode Dismantle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
NIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Performing calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Reprocess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 CO2 zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ATC Compressed air cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Switching on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Configure interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Automatic alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Configure units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . 163
Automatic leakage compensation . . . . . . . . . . 265 Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
AutoRelease, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Configuring the screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configuring units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Configuring ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Connection with other electrical equipment . . . . 8
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Index
Country-specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Format templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Freeze curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
D Front, Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Data export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 G
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Central gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Device check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Device extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 From cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Dialog window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Gas supply unit
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Display curves and measured values . . . . . . . . 85 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Display data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 General WARNINGS and CAUTIONS . . . . . . . 10
All measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Hospital-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Setting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Graphic trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 164
Display logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Display measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 H
Disposable cuvettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Header bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Disposal of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Height above sea level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
E HFO sigh, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
HME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Electrical power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Hospital-specific measured values . . . . . . . . . 146
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Humidifier holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Internal Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51 I
Mains power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Environment of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Import/export of configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Exchange intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Exchanging the ambient air filter . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Infinity Acute Care System, system
Expiratory compensation, Switching on or overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Infinity C500
Expiratory valve Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Dismantle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 204 Infinity ID breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 62
Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Infinity ID components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
External screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Inspiratory hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Inspiratory termination
F Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Inspiratory termination criterion . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Failure of the acoustic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Installing the CO2 cuvette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fault-Cause-Remedy Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Internal Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51
Fisher & Paykel MR 850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Flow reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Flow trigger, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Index
L Non-Invasive Ventilation
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Lateral flaps on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Leak rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Leakage Compensation Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Switching on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Literature references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 O
Locking of therapy controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 O2 monitoring
Loops Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Evaluate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reference loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 O2 sensor
Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
M O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Machine cleaning and disinfection . . . . . . . . . . 199 Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Set O2 and flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Observe the Instructions for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 207 Operating Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Manual disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Manual inspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Operation display of ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Manual ventilation device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver . . . . 90
Measurement principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
MEDIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Medication nebulization P
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 281
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Patient category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Patient monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 13
Medication nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Dismantle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Pmax/Paw high autoset
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Switching on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Pneumatic functional description . . . . . . . . . . 268
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 127 Pneumatic medication nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Monitoring fields, change display . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Power failure alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Power supply unit
N Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Nebulizer Aeroneb Pro MP 01 010 . . . . . . . . . . 97 Preparing Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Neonatal flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Pressure-controlled ventilation modes . . . . . . . 77
Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Previous patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Neonatal flow sensor
Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 R
Dismantle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Range of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Rear, Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Replacing insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Reprocessing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reprocess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Reprocessing methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reusable cuvettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
New patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Reprocess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Index
S U
Safety inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 208 Uninterruptible power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Screen text language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Universal holder with standard rail . . . . . . . . . . 39
Screen view USB storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 V
Select patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Select therapy type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Ventilation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Selecting the cuvette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Ventilation modes
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Service dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Ventilation parameters
Sigh, Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Exceed set limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Slope, configuring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Linked setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Smart Pulmonary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Set directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 74, 75
Spontaneous breathing support . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Volume guarantee
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Switching on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Start therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Volume guarantee (HFO), description . . . . . . 256
Start-up settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 156
Sterilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
System cable
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
System overview
Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Infinity Acute Care System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
T
Tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Test lung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Therapy bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Therapy control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Toggle switch
Babylog VN500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Transportation of patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
hospital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Trends
Configure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Trolley, preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Password for Babylog VN500
SW 2.n

Cut out from the Instructions for Use

Babylog VN500 SW 2.n

4572
To prevent unauthorized adjustments, the following

screens are password-protected:
– System setup > Screen layout > Views

– System setup > Alarms

– System setup > Ventilation
– System setup > Applications
– System setup > Exchange intervals

Password
To prevent unauthorized adjustments, the following

screens in the dialog window System setup are
password-protected:
– Screen layout > Views
– Alarms
– Ventilation
– Applications
The password appears on this page of the Instruc-
tions for Use. Cut out the area with the password
and keep in a place which is safe from access by
unauthorized persons.
If the area with the password has been removed,
ask the person responsible for your device about
making adjustments to the screens specified.
These Instructions for Use only apply to
Babylog VN500 SW 2.n
with the Serial No.:
If no Serial No. has been filled in by Dräger,
these Instructions for Use are provided for gen-
eral information only and are not intended for
use with any specific device or unit.
This document is provided for customer informa-
tion only, and will not be updated or exchanged
without customer request.
Directive 93/42/EEC Directive 1999/5/EC

concerning Medical Products regarding radio installations
and telecommunications equipment.
Manufacturer
Dräger Medical AG & Co. KG

Moislinger Allee 53 – 55
D-23542 Lübeck
Germany
+49 451 8 82-0
FAX +49 451 8 82-20 80

http://www.draeger.com
9038982 – GA 6500.360 en
© Dräger Medical AG & Co. KG
1st edition – June 2009
Dräger Medical reserves the right to make mod-
ifications to the equipment without prior notice.

Инструкция Система Вентиляции Dräger Babylog VN500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Инструкция Система Вентиляции Dräger Babylog VN500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions for Use

Infinity Acute Care System

WARNING Babylog VN500

Abbreviations and Symbols

Please refer to "Abbreviations" on page 25 and

For Your Safety and that of Your Patients . . 7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

For Your Safety and that of Your Patients

Strictly follow these Instructions for Use . . . . . . 8

General WARNINGS and CAUTIONS . . . . . . 10

Strictly follow these Instructions for Use Accessories

The medical device must be subject to regular safe-

Networking This publication excludes references to various

The design of the medical device, the accompany-

The essential performance consists in controlled

General WARNINGS and CAUTIONS

The following WARNINGS and CAUTIONS apply to WARNING

Note on EMC/ESD risk for the device Sterile accessories

Monitoring ventilation Handling Infinity ID components

Back-up ventilation with an independent Emission of high-frequency energy

The RFID system of this medical device complies

Indications for use and contraindications . . 16

Indications for use and contraindications

Infinity Acute Care System –

Gas supply unit GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Power supply unit PS500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Infinity Acute Care System – Workstation Neonatal Care

How to use the Workstation Neonatal

A Infinity C500 – control and display unit (Medical

Front Front, flap folded upwards

Front, flap closed

H Gas outlet Exhaust, non-tapered connection

Rear Left side

A B Connection for gas connection to the gas

A Holder for Infinity C500

Gas supply unit GS500

A LED for display of mains power supply B Rating plate

Power supply unit PS500

A Fault indicator E Cable duct

The functions described correspond to the overall Additional information

Connections for the breathing hoses Gas supply unit GS500

Power supply unit PS500 For medication nebulization a pneumatic medica-

Babylog VN500 features country-specific connec-

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

C Compliance Exp. Label on the device, Expiratory port

cmH2O Measuring unit for pressure FCC Federal Communications

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

LAN Local Area Network PC-APRV Pressure Control-Airway Pressure

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation

Group Therapy, ventilation parameter Setting or access locked

PS500: Failure, fault

Connection for equipotential bonding

Application part type BF

Marking point on the trolley – do not

ESD warning symbol

2009 Manufacturing date

Connection for the neonatal flow sensor

Device switched off

Labeling for FCC approval

Additional symbols on Infinity C500 (Medical

Operating concept for Infinity C500 . . . . . . . 32

Operating concept for Babylog VN500. . . . . 32